33714 Qrcode Scanner Programming Guide

User Manual: Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 334

Download33714 Qrcode Scanner Programming Guide
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Gryphon™ 2D Family
General Purpose Handheld
Area Imager Bar Code Reader
Gryphon I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Product Reference Guide


Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, Oregon 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures
described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission
of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic Scanning”). Owners of Datalogic
products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for
the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic
representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.scanning.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the
U.S.A and the E.U. All other brand and product names referred to herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Microsoft Windows®, Windows® XP and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Patents
Gryphon I GD44XX
This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents:
Design Patents: CN ZL200830142386.5; CN ZL200930006852.1; EP870787; USD599799; USD606076
Utility Patents: EP996284; EP999514; EP1128315; EP1172756; EP1396811; EP1413971; EP1828957; JP4435343;
US5481098; US6478224; US6512218; US6513714; US6561427; US6758403; US6808114; US6877664; US6997385;
US7053954; US7234641; US7387246; US7721966
Gryphon GM440X, GBT4400
This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents:
Design Patents: CN ZL200830142386.5; CN ZL200930006852.1; CN ZL201030175545.9; EP870787; EP1177943;
USD599799; USD606076; USD629003
Utility Patents: EP996284; EP999514; EP1128315; EP1172756; EP1396811; EP1413971; EP1828957; JP4435343;
US5481098; US6478224; US6512218; US6513714; US6561427; US6758403; US6808114; US6877664; US6997385;
US7053954; US7234641; US7387246; US7721966.
BC40XX, UV Counterfeit Detection, CFS4000, CHR-GM40
This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents:
Design Patents: CN ZL201030175545.9; EP1177943; USD629003
Additional patents pending.

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9
About this Manual .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Manual Conventions ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
References ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Datalogic Website Support ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................10
Reseller Technical Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
Telephone Technical Support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................10
About the Reader ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
The BC40xx™ Radio Base ............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
Base LEDs .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
Base Button .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection .............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Battery Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Programming the Reader ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Configuration Methods ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................16

SETUP .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Unpacking ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Setting Up the Reader .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Installing the Interface Cable ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Configuring the Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Changing the Base Station Position ..............................................................................................................................................................................................21
Connecting the Base Station ............................................................................................................................................................................................................22
Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled .................................................................................................................................................................25
Linking the Reader to a Base Station .............................................................................................................................................................................................25
Linking a BT Reader to a PC ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................26
Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts .............................................................................................................................................. 27
Stand Alone Layouts ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................27
Interface Selection ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Setting the Interface ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................29
Customizing Configuration Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Configure Interface Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Global Interface Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Configuring Other Features ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Software Version Transmission .......................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults .....................................................................................................................................................................34
Replacing the Battery ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................35

CONFIGURATION USING BAR CODES............................................................................................................................................ 37
Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES .................................................................................................................................................. 39
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore .............................................................................................................................................................................39
USB Suspend Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................39

RS-232 Interface...................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Baud Rate ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................42
Data Bits .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43
Stop Bits ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43
Parity ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Handshaking Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................................45

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces................................................................................................................................................... 46
Intercharacter Delay .......................................................................................................................................................................................................47
Beep On ASCII BEL ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................47
Beep On Not on File .......................................................................................................................................................................................................48
ACK NAK Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................49

Product Reference Guide

1

Contents
ACK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
NAK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
ACK NAK Timeout Value ...............................................................................................................................................................................................51
ACK NAK Retry Count ....................................................................................................................................................................................................51
ACK NAK Error Handling ...............................................................................................................................................................................................52
Indicate Transmission Failure .....................................................................................................................................................................................52
Disable Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................................53
Enable Character .............................................................................................................................................................................................................53

Keyboard Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Country Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................56
Send Control Characters ..............................................................................................................................................................................................60
Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................61
Intercode Delay ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................61
Caps Lock State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................62
Numlock .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................62
USB Keyboard Speed .....................................................................................................................................................................................................62
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................................................................................................64

USB-OEM Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 65
USB-OEM Device Usage ................................................................................................................................................................................................66
Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................66

IBM 46XX Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 67
46xx Number of Host Resets .......................................................................................................................................................................................68
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ..........................................................................................................................................................................70
Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................70

Wand Emulation Interface ..................................................................................................................................................... 71
Wand Signal Speed ........................................................................................................................................................................................................72
Wand Polarity ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................72
Wand Idle State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................73
Transmit Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................................................73
Label Symbology Conversion .....................................................................................................................................................................................74

Data Format ............................................................................................................................................................................ 75
Global Prefix/Suffix ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Global AIM ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 77
Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 ...............................................................................................................................................................................................79
Label ID .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................80
Individually Set Label ID .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................81
Label ID Control ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................81
Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies ..............................................................................................................................................82
Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit ...................................................................................................................................................................87
Case Conversion ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................87
Character Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................................................................88

Reading Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
Double Read Timeout ...................................................................................................................................................................................................90
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ................................................................................................................................................... 92
Power On Alert .................................................................................................................................................................................................................92
Good Read: When to Indicate .....................................................................................................................................................................................92
Good Read Beep Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Good Read Beep Frequency .......................................................................................................................................................................................93
Good Read Beep Length ..............................................................................................................................................................................................94
Good Read Beep Volume .............................................................................................................................................................................................95
Good Read LED Duration .............................................................................................................................................................................................96
SCANNING FEATURES ................................................................................................................................................................. 97
Scan Mode .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................97
Stand Mode Indication ..................................................................................................................................................................................................98
Stand Operation ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................99
Pick Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100
Stand Mode Sensitivity .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 100
Stand Mode Illumination Off Time ........................................................................................................................................................................ 101
Scanning Active Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 101
Stand Illumination Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 102

2

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents
Motion Still Timeout ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Flash On Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Flash Off Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Aiming Pointer .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Aiming Duration Timer .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Green Spot Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Mobile Phone Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Partial Label Reading Control .................................................................................................................................................................................. 106
Decode Negative Image ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 106
Image Capture .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 106
CORDED ONLY FEATURES .........................................................................................................................................................107
Corded Stand Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Corded Stand Beep ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
MULTIPLE LABEL READING ......................................................................................................................................................108
Multiple Labels per Frame ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ................................................................................................................................................. 109
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 109

1D Symbologies.................................................................................................................................................................... 111
1D Code Selection ......................................................................................................................................................................................111
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES ....................................................................................................................................................112
CODE EAN/UPC ..........................................................................................................................................................................113
Coupon Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 113
UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 114
UPC-A Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 114
UPC-A Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 115
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................. 115
UPC-A 2D Component ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 116
UPC-E ..........................................................................................................................................................................................116
UPC-E Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 116
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 117
UPC-E 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 117
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 118
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................... 119
GTIN FORMATTING ....................................................................................................................................................................119
EAN 13 (JAN 13) .........................................................................................................................................................................120
EAN 13 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 120
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 120
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 121
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 121
EAN-13 2D Component ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
ISSN ............................................................................................................................................................................................122
ISSN Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
EAN 8 (JAN 8) .............................................................................................................................................................................123
EAN 8 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 123
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 124
EAN 8 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 124
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................................................125
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check .................................................................................................................................................................................. 125
UPC/EAN Quiet Zones ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 126
ADD-ONS ....................................................................................................................................................................................127
Optional Add-ons ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 127
Optional Add-On Timer ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 128
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer ........................................................................................................................................................................... 131
CODE 39 ......................................................................................................................................................................................134
Code 39 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 134
Code 39 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 134
Code 39 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 135
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 136
Code 39 Full ASCII ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 136

Product Reference Guide

3

Contents
Code 39 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 137
Code 39 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 137
Code 39 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 138
Code 39 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 139
TRIOPTIC CODE ..........................................................................................................................................................................140
Trioptic Code Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................. 140
CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) ...............................................................................................................................140
Code 32 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 140
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Code 32 Check Char Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 141
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) .............................................................................................................................142
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 142
CODE 39 DANISH PPT ................................................................................................................................................................142
Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................................................................... 142
CODE 39 LAPOSTE .....................................................................................................................................................................143
Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................ 143
CODE 39 PZN ..............................................................................................................................................................................143
Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
CODE 128 ...................................................................................................................................................................................144
Code 128 Enable/Disable .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Expand Code 128 to Code 39 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Code 128 Check Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
Code 128 Function Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission .................................................................................................................................................... 146
Code 128 Quiet Zones ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 146
Code 128 Length Control .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Code 128 Set Length 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Code 128 Set Length 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
GS1-128 ......................................................................................................................................................................................150
GS1-128 Enable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 150
GS1-128 2D Component ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
CODE ISBT 128 ...........................................................................................................................................................................151
ISBT 128 Concatenation ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................ 152
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ........................................................................................................................................................ 153
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 153
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) .................................................................................................................................................154
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 154
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 155
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 156
I 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 156
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 157
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 158
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR .....................................................................................................................................................159
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 159
FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ..........................................................................................................................................................................159
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................... 159
STANDARD 2 OF 5 .....................................................................................................................................................................160
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 160
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 160
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................. 161
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 162
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 163
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................164
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 164
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................ 165
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 165
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 166

4

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 167
CODE IATA ..................................................................................................................................................................................168
IATA Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 168
IATA Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 168
CODABAR ...................................................................................................................................................................................169
Codabar Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 169
Codabar Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 169
Codabar Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 170
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 170
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match ................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Codabar Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Codabar Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 172
Codabar Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 173
Codabar Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 174
ABC CODABAR ...........................................................................................................................................................................175
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................. 175
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 175
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 176
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 177
CODE 11 ......................................................................................................................................................................................178
Code 11 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 178
Code 11 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Code 11 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 179
Code 11 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 179
Code 11 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Code 11 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL .......................................................................................................................................182
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................... 182
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation ....................................................................................................................................... 182
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component .............................................................................................................................................. 183
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED .....................................................................................................................................................183
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 183
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation ................................................................................................................................................... 184
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................... 185
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................. 186
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 187
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ..........................................................................................................................................................188
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................. 188
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 188
GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component ................................................................................................................................................................ 189
CODE 93 ......................................................................................................................................................................................189
Code 93 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 189
Code 93 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 190
Code 93 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 190
Code 93 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 191
Code 93 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 192
Code 93 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 193
Code 93 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 194
MSI ..............................................................................................................................................................................................194
MSI Enable/Disable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194
MSI Check Character Calculation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 195
MSI Check Character Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 195
MSI Length Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 196
MSI Set Length 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
MSI Set Length 2 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 198
PLESSEY ......................................................................................................................................................................................199
Plessey Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 199
Plessey Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Plessey Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 200
Plessey Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 200

Product Reference Guide

5

Contents
Plessey Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201
Plessey Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 202

2D Symbologies.................................................................................................................................................................... 203
2D Global Features .....................................................................................................................................................................................203
2D Maximum Decoding Time ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 204
2D Structured Append .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205
2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 205
Aztec Code ..................................................................................................................................................................................................206
Aztec Code Enable / Disable .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 206
Aztec Code Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 206
Aztec Code Set Length 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
Aztec Code Set Length 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 208
China Sensible Code ...................................................................................................................................................................................209
China Sensible Code Enable / Disable ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 209
China Sensible Code Length Control ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 209
China Sensible Code Set Length 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 210
China Sensible Code Set Length 2 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Data Matrix .................................................................................................................................................................................................212
Data Matrix Enable / Disable ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 212
Data Matrix Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 213
Data Matrix Set Length 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 213
Data Matrix Set Length 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 214
Maxicode .....................................................................................................................................................................................................215
Maxicode Enable / Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
Maxicode Primary Message Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................................ 215
Maxicode Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 216
Maxicode Set Length 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 216
Maxicode Set Length 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 217
PDF417 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................218
PDF417 Enable / Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 218
PDF417 Length Control ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 218
PDF417 Set Length 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 219
PDF417 Set Length 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 220
Micro PDF417 ..............................................................................................................................................................................................221
Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 221
Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation .......................................................................................................................................................................... 221
Micro PDF417 Length Control ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 222
Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
QR Code .......................................................................................................................................................................................................224
QR Code Enable / Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 224
QR Code Length Control ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 224
QR Code Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 225
QR Code Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 226
Micro QR Code ............................................................................................................................................................................................227
Micro QR Code Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Micro QR Code Length Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Micro QR Code Set Length 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Micro QR Code Set Length 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 229
UCC Composite ...........................................................................................................................................................................................230
UCC Composite Enable / Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 230
UCC Optional Composite Timer ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 231
Postal Code Selection .................................................................................................................................................................................232
Postnet BB Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 233

WIRELESS FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................ 235
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ...................................................................................................................................................236
Good Transmission Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
Beep Frequency ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 236
Beep Duration ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 237
Beep Volume ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 238
Disconnect Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 238

6

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Contents
Docking Beep ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 239
Leash Alarm .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 239
CONFIGURATION UPDATES ......................................................................................................................................................241
Automatic Configuration Update .......................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Copy Configuration to Scanner .............................................................................................................................................................................. 241
Copy Configuration to Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 241
BATCH FEATURES ......................................................................................................................................................................242
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 242
Send Batch ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 242
Erase Batch Memory ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 243
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay ............................................................................................................................................................................... 243
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK .........................................................................................................................................................244

Bluetooth-Only Features...................................................................................................................................................... 245
RF ADDRESS STAMPING ............................................................................................................................................................245
Source Radio Address Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 245
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ........................................................................................................................................................ 246
Link Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 246
BT SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................247
BT Security Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 247
BT PIN Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 248
Select PIN Code Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 248
Set PIN Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 248
OTHER BT FEATURES .................................................................................................................................................................249
BT Poll Rate ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 249
Power Off ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 250
Powerdown Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 250

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY .................................................................................................................................. 251
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ................................................................................................................................................................................. 251
STAR Radio Transmit Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 252

Motion Features................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Motion Aiming Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Motion Sensitivity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 254
Motionless Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 254

REFERENCES................................................................................................................................................................................. 255
RS-232 Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................................256
RS-232 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 256
RS-232/USB COM Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 257
Keyboard Interface .....................................................................................................................................................................................264
Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 264
Intercharacter Delay ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 265
Intercode Delay .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 266
Symbologies ...............................................................................................................................................................................................267
Set Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 267
Data Editing ................................................................................................................................................................................................268
Global Prefix/Suffix ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269
Global AIM ID ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 270
Label ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 271
Character Conversion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 276
Reading Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................277
Good Read LED Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 277
Scanning Features ......................................................................................................................................................................................278
Scan Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 278
Stand Mode Off Time ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 279
Scanning Active Time ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 280
Aiming Duration Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
Flash On Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 282
Flash Off Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 283
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ...................................................................................................................................................................... 284
RF Features .................................................................................................................................................................................................286
Automatic Configuration Update ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 286
RF Address Stamping ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 286

Product Reference Guide

7

Contents
BT-Only Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288
Motion Features .........................................................................................................................................................................................289
Motionless Timeout .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 289

MESSAGE FORMATTING.............................................................................................................................................................. 291
Message Formatting ..................................................................................................................................................................................291
LED and Beeper Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 292

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................................................................................... 293
Imager Labeling ..........................................................................................................................................................................................297
Standard Cable Pinouts .............................................................................................................................................................................298
LED and Beeper Indications .......................................................................................................................................................................300
Error Codes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................301
Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) ...................................................................................................................................302

STANDARD DEFAULTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 303
SAMPLE BAR CODES.................................................................................................................................................................... 315
KEYPAD ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 319
SCANCODE TABLES ..................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Control Character Emulation .....................................................................................................................................................................321
Single Press and Release Keys ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE ...............................................................................................322
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode ...........................................................................................................324
Digital Interface ..........................................................................................................................................................................................326
IBM31xx 102-key ........................................................................................................................................................................................327
IBM XT ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................328
Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 .........................................................................................................................................................329

8

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 1
Introduction
About this Manual
This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical
information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The Quick
Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are downloadable
free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.

Overview
Chapter 1, (this chapter) presents information about manual conventions, and an overview of
the reader, its features and operation.
Chapter 2, Setup presents information about unpacking, cable connection information and
setting up the reader.
Chapter 3, Configuration Using Bar Codes provides instructions and bar code labels for customizing
your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general features, data formatting,
symbology-specific and model-specific features.
Chapter 4, References provides background information and detailed instructions for more
complex programming items.
Chapter 5, Message Formatting gives details for programming options.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as well as
environmental and regulatory specifications. It also provides standard cable pinouts and LED/
Beeper functions.
Appendix B, Standard Defaults references common factory default settings for reader features and
options.
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes offers sample bar codes for several common symbologies.
Appendix D, Keypad includes numeric bar codes to be scanned for certain parameter settings.
Appendix E, Scancode Tables lists control character emulation information for Wedge and USB
Keyboard interfaces.

Product Reference Guide

9

Introduction

References

Manual Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures
that must be observed when using the reader:
Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing, repairing
and operating the reader.

The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment or property.

CAUTION

References
Current versions of this Product Reference Guide (PRG), Quick Reference Guide (QRG), the
Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application, and any other manuals, instruction sheets and
utilities for this product can be downloaded from the website listed below. Alternatively, printed
copies or product support CDs for most products can be purchased through your Datalogic
reseller.

Technical Support
Datalogic Website Support
The Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical support and
information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, warranty information,
product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning
products for repair.

Reseller Technical Support
An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller.
A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer
systems and can provide individualized assistance.

Telephone Technical Support
If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at
(541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact information.

10

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

About the Reader

Introduction

About the Reader
Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications
settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be
accomplished by scanning the programming bar codes within this guide.
Two models of the Gryphon 2D are available, and are covered in this manual:
• Gryphon I GD44XX - Corded 2D imager bar code reader
• Gryphon I GBT4400 - Model with Bluetooth options.
Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration
application which is downloadable from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover of this
manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a PC. It
communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create configuration bar
codes to print.
Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers significantly improve
the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in
Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote
comfortable handling during extended periods of use.
See "Interface Selection" on page 29 for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by
model type.

Product Reference Guide

11

Introduction

The BC40xx™ Radio Base

The BC40xx™ Radio Base
Base LEDs
LEDs on the Gryphon Base provide information about the Base’s status, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Gryphon Base LEDs

YELLOW LED

BUTTON

RED LED /
GREEN LED

The following table describes the significance of each LED:
LED

STATUS
Yellow On = Base is powered

Power on / Data

Yellow Blinking = Base receives data and 
commands from the Host or the Reader.

Charging

Red On = Battery charging is in progress.

Charge completed

Green On = the Battery is completely charged.

Charging + Charge completed

Red and Green Blinking together = the Reader is not
correctly placed onto the Base.

See Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) on page 302 for more specific details on the
LEDs.

Base Button
The Base contains a button which is used primarily to perform a paging function. Pressing the
button causes a sound signal to be emitted by all scanners linked with this Base, as long as the
scanner is awake (see Powerdown Timeout on page 250) and reception is enabled (see LED and
Beeper Indicators on page 92). The button can also be used to "force device connection" via the
Datalogic Aladdin Software tool (available for free download from the Datalogic website). See
the Aladdin Online Help for details.
See "Base Station Button Indicators" on page 302 for further information on Base Button
functions.

12

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection

Introduction

BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection
The BC40XX Radio Base is available with a UV Counterfeit Money Detector, typically used to
verify the authenticity of bank notes. Other uses for counterfeit detection are passport, ticket,
credit card, travelers’ check and similar applications where it is possible to detect fluorescent
marks with UV light.
The detector contains eight special UV LEDs, as shown below:

UV LEDs

The Counterfeit Detector is based on UV fluorescent emission. Real banknotes under
ultraviolet rays usually absorb the UV light and will show special marks made with fluorescent
inks. On the other hand, most counterfeit banknotes only reflect the UV lights, without
showing fluorescent marks.

To use:
1. Quickly press the Base button to light the UV LEDs.
2. Hold the item to be verified under the LED lights to ensure that the special fluorescent
marks are visible.

Product Reference Guide

13

Introduction

Battery Safety
3. The LEDs are set to switch off automatically after about 2 minutes. To keep the UV LEDs
in always-on mode, quickly press the Base button a second time within 10 seconds of the
first press. To switch them off, simply press the button again.
An external power supply is necessary for full functionality of the Base station with UV
Counterfeit Detector. Use only the recommended AC adapter 12Vdc.

Battery Safety
To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instructions in
this manual.
Before installing the Battery, read “Battery Safety” on this and the following pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

WARNING

WARNING

14

Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in
devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot,
explode or ignite and cause serious injury.
Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to
abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below:
•
Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.
• Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other
with any metal object (such as wire).
•
Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.
•
Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.
•
Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.
• Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.
• Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.
In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well
with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause
damage to the eye.

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Battery Safety

Introduction
Always charge the battery at 32° – 104°F (0° - 40°C) temperature range.

CAUTION

Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and void your warranty.
Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices,
which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite.
Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations.
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather.
Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.
Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware.
Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other
way.
Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.
Do not remove or damage the battery pack’s label.
Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.
Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.

As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time. Capacity
deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not. It is
difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers rate them at
500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take 500 full discharge /
charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if partial discharging /
recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging.
Storage of batteries for long time at fully charged status or at fully discharged status should be
avoided.
Only in case of long storage, to avoid deep discharge of the battery it is recommended to partially
recharge the battery every three months to keep the charge status at a medium level.
As a reference, run a fast recharge for 20 minutes every three months on unused products to avoid
any performance deterioration of the cell.

The useful life of LI batteries depends on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they
should be removed from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to
use a battery showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and
replaced.
Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with European
Directive 2006/66/EC, 2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC and subsequent modifications, US and
China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the environment.

Product Reference Guide

15

Introduction

Programming the Reader

Programming the Reader
Configuration Methods
Programming Bar Codes
The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the
interface bar code, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the
instructions and programming bar code labels available in the corresponding features section for
your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in "Configuration Parameters"
starting on page 37.
Some programming labels, like "Restore Custom Defaults" on page 34, require only the scan of the
single label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in Programming
Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code once to enter Programming
Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parameter settings before
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code a second time, which will then accept your changes, exit
Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.
There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described
above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when
configuring each programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™
Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly
configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin is available on the CDROM provided with your product, and also from the Datalogic website. Aladdin allows you to
program the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical
interface running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected
communication interface, or they can be printed as bar codes to be scanned.
Aladdin also provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected device (see the
Datalogic Aladdin™ Help On-Line for more details).

16

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 2
Setup
Unpacking
Check carefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged. If
any damage occurred during shipment, contact Datalogic Technical Support. Information is
shown on page 10.
KEEP THE PACKAGING. Should the unit ever require service, it should be returned in its
original shipping container.

Setting Up the Reader
Depending on whether you are using a Corded or BT version of the Gryphon, follow the steps
provided in this section to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its host.
1. Begin by Installing the Interface Cable (Corded) or Connecting the Base Station (BT)
2. Go to Interface Selection and set the desired interface.
3. Configure Interface Settings (only if not using factory settings for that interface)
4. Go to Configuring Other Features (if modifications are needed from factory settings)

Product Reference Guide

17

Setup

Installing the Interface Cable

Installing the Interface Cable
For Corded versions, connect the reader cable by inserting the cable into the handle as shown in
Figure 2. To remove it, insert a paper clip into the release aperture, then unplug the cable.
Figure 2. Connect/disconnect the cable

RS-232 Serial Connection
Turn off power to the terminal/PC and connect the reader to the terminal/PC serial port via the
RS-232 cable as shown in Figure 3. If the terminal will not support POT (Power Off the
Terminal) to supply reader power, use the approved power supply (AC Adapter). Plug the AC
Adapter barrel connector into the socket on the RS-232 cable connector and the AC Adapter
plug into a standard power outlet.
Figure 3. RS-232 Connection

18

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Installing the Interface Cable

Setup

Keyboard Wedge Connection
The Keyboard Wedge cable has a ‘Y’ connection from the reader. Connect the female to the
male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the terminal/PC.
Reference Figure 4.
Figure 4. Keyboard Wedge Interface connection

USB Connection
Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the
interface type you ordered. Reference Figure 5.
Figure 5. USB connection

Other connection types are described below and illustrated in Figure 6.

Product Reference Guide

19

Setup

Configuring the Base Station

nd

Figure 6. Other Interface Connections

W

M

Ke

or...

a

IB

W ybo
ed ard
ge

or...

Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The connectors illustrated above are examples only. Actual connectors may vary from
those illustrated, but the steps to connect the reader remain the same.

RF Models
The power supply connects directly to the base (not on the cable's jack) for all configurations.
For all interfaces (except RS-232) a power supply is recommended but not necessary, because
the base can be powered from the Host. When the base is powered from the Host, select a slow
charge rate.

Configuring the Base Station
The base charger/station may be configured in desk application to hold the reader in two
different positions, either a horizontal or standing position, in order to provide the most
comfortable use depending on needs.

Standing

20

Horizontal

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station

Setup

Changing the Base Station Position
The base station is configured by installing one of two sets of mechanical parts that come with
the cordless kit. The default mounts (shown below) provide three options: vertical (wall)
mounting, standing (45°), or horizontal mounting with a higher mechanical retention of the
scanner. Use the other mounts only for horizontal mounting, with lower retention of the
scanner. The different parts may be interchanged to customize retention preferences.
A tool such as a rigid pen or a flat screwdriver can be used to change the
mounts. Do not allow it to touch the contacts.

1. Insert the appropriate parts for the desired base station position, as shown below.

Horizontal
ONLY

Standing,
Horizontal
or Vertical

To ensure best contact and performance, do not intermix the parts of the two
different mount sets.

CAUTION
2. Using your thumbs, push open the plastic tabs on the bottom of the base to free the wing
holders.

Tab

Tab

Product Reference Guide

21

Setup

Configuring the Base Station
3. The stand can now be repositioned in either horizontal or standing position.

Horizontal

Standing

Connecting the Base Station
Figure 7 shows how to connect the Base Station to a terminal, PC or other host device. Turn off
the host before connection and consult the manual for that equipment (if necessary) before
proceeding. Connect the interface cable before applying power to the Base Station.
The Gryphon GBT4400 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the
host. If you are connecting to a system that uses a custom security PIN, follow the
procedure in "Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled" on page 25. For
information on how to configure this feature, see "BT Security Mode" starting on page
247.

Base Station Connection and Routing: Fully insert the Power Cable and Interface (I/F) Cable
connectors into their respective ports in the underside of the Base Station (see Figure 7). Then
connect to an AC Adapter, and plug the AC power cord into the (wall) outlet.
Gryphon Wireless can also be Powered by the Terminal. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.
For some specific interfaces or hosts or lengths of cable, the use of an external
power supply may be recommended for full recharging capability (see "Technical
Specifications" on page 293 for more details).

22

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station

Setup

Figure 7. Connecting the Base Station

Wall plug
Connector

I/F Cable
AC/DC
Adapter
DC Power
Cord
Base
Station

Securing the DC Power Cord (Optional)
The DC power cord for the adapter can be secured to the bottom of the base in order to
maximize the mechanical retention of the cable itself. The routing of the power cord can be
changed to accommodate the base station positioning: horizontal, stand or wall mounting. The
cables can be looped around to the front of the Base Station, or fed directly out the back of the
Base Station, as shown in Figure 8 on page 23.
Figure 8. Options for routing the DC cord

Please refer to the arrows depicted on the bottom of the base when placing the cables, detailed in
Figure 9.

Product Reference Guide

23

Setup

Configuring the Base Station
Figure 9. Arrows showing routing

Host Connection: Verify before connection that the reader’s cable type is compatible with your
host equipment.
Most connections plug directly into the host device as shown in Figure 10. Keyboard Wedge
interface cables have a ‘Y’ connection where its female end mates with the male end of the cable
from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port on the terminal/PC.

B

Figure 10. Connecting to the Host

Wa

Ke W

or...

nd

US

yb
ed oard
ge

or...

M

or...
IB

Power Connection : Plug the AC Adapter in to an approved AC wall socket with the cable
facing downwards (as shown in Figure 7) to prevent undue strain on the socket.
Disconnecting the Cable: To detach the cable, insert a paper clip or similar object into the hole
on the base, as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11. Disconnecting the Cable

Insert
Paper Clip

24

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuring the Base Station

Setup

Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled
When connecting the Base to a system that has a custom Security Pin enabled, follow the steps
below in the order shown:
1. Power down the host system.
2. Connect the appropriate interface cable into the Base as shown in Figure 10.
3. Place the reader in the Base.
4. Power up the host. The reader will link to the Base
5. When the host completely powers up, a new custom Security Pin Code may be sent to the
reader and Base, depending on host configuration. Contact Datalogic Technical Support
for more information.
If you want to change security settings or set up a PIN, see "BT Security
Mode" starting on page 247.

Linking the Reader to a Base Station
RF Devices
For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the
base. To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake it and place it on the base. If
the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first scan the Unlink action
command before re-linking to the new base.
Unlnk
Unlnk

BT Models only
Remember: The mandatory condition for establishing a new linking between a BT handheld
and a BT base is that the handheld is unlinked and they share the same security configuration. A
successful link is indicated by three ascending tones from the reader. A high-low-high-low tone
indicates the link attempt was unsuccessful. A single green LED flash after this tone indicates no
Base Station was discovered. Two green LED flashes after this tone indicates that more than one
Base Station was discovered and the reader did not link. Three LED flashes after this tone
indicate a security error.

Product Reference Guide

25

Setup

Configuring the Base Station

Linking a BT Reader to a PC
The reader can optionally be linked to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile, in
either server mode or client mode.

Linking to a PC in Server Mode (BT Slave Mode)
To link a BT reader in server mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC, follow these steps:
1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.
2. Scan the bar code below to make the scanner visible to the host computer.

³

L

n

k

S

v

Link to a PC in Server Mode

3. Use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on
the device.
4. Select “connect” on the PC to link the reader to the PC. Use an RS-232 terminal program
to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.

Linking to a PC in Client Mode (BT Master Mode)
The reader can optionally be linked in client mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial
port profile. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Ensure the PC or terminal can network with Bluetooth devices and that it is powered on.
2. Ensure that a COM port is assigned under Services within the Bluetooth setup menu.
3. Create a Link label that contains the address of the PC Bluetooth adapter.
The Bluetooth address can be found under "Properties" within in the
Bluetooth setup menu.
NOTE

The link label is a Code 128 function 3 label with the following format:
LnkB<12 character Bluetooth address>
4. Scan the link label you created in step 3.

Power Off
Shuts off power to the BT handheld until next trigger pull. This function only applies to the BT
model.

26

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts

Setup

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts
Stand Alone Layouts
Figure 12. Single Reader Layout

Figure 13. Multiple Reader Layout

Wireless models only
(not valid for BT model)

In stand alone systems, each base station is connected to a single Host.

Product Reference Guide

27

Setup

Gryphon™ 2D System and Network Layouts
Figure 14. Multiple Stand Alone Layouts

Mobile models only
(not valid for BT model)

Many stand alone connections can operate in the same physical area without interference,
provided all readers and base stations in the system have different addresses.

28

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Selection

Setup

Interface Selection
Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed to Table 1
starting on page 30 to select the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232,
Keyboard Wedge, USB, etc.). Scan the appropriate bar code in that section to configure your
system’s correct interface type.
Each reader model will support one of the following sets of host interfaces:
General Purpose Models
• RS-232
• RS-232 OPOS
• USB-COM
• Keyboard Wedge
• Wand Emulation (BT only)

Retail Point of Sale Models
• RS-232
• RS-232 OPOS
• USB
• IBM 46XX

Setting the Interface
Scan the programming bar code from this section which selects the appropriate interface type
matching the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to the corresponding
section in this manual (also listed in Table 1 on page 30) to configure any desired settings and
features associated with that interface.
Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections
require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT
scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning an interface selection bar
code.
Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when
powered up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this
state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will
change to a state that allows programming with bar codes.

Product Reference Guide

29

Setup

Interface Selection
Table 1. Available Interfaces

RS-232

FEATURES

RS-232 standard interface
Select RS232-STD
$P,HA12,P(CR)
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
Set RS-232
Interface
Features
starting on
page 41

Select RS232-WN
$P,HA13,P(CR)
RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS
Select RS-232 OPOS
$P,HA47,P(CR)
USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface
Select USB-COM-STDa

IBM

FEATURES

$P,HA08,P(CR)
IBM-46xx Port 5B reader interface
Set IBM
Interface
Features
starting on
page 67

Select IBM-P5B
$P,HA23,P(CR)
IBM-46xx Port 9B reader interface
Select IBM-P9B

USB-OEM

FEATURES

$P,HA45,P(CR)
USB-OEM
(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)
Select USB-OEM

Set USB-OEM
Interface
Features
starting on
page 65

a. Download the correct USB Com driver from www.datalogic.com

30

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Selection

Setup

KEYBOARD

FEATURES

$P,HA2B,P(CR)
USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding
Select USB Alternate Keyboard
$P,HA29,P(CR)

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70,
80, 90 & 95 w/Standard Key Encoding
Select KBD-AT
$P,HA11,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with
standard key encoding but without
external keyboard

Select KBD-AT-NK
$P,HA26,P(CR)

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70,
80, 90 & 95 w/Alternate Key
Select KBD-AT-ALT
$P,HA10,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with
alternate key encoding but without
external keyboard

Set KEYBOARD
WEDGE
Interface
Features
starting on page
55

Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK
$P,HA28,P(CR)
PC/XT w/Standard Key Encoding
Select KBD-XT
$P,HA14,P(CR)
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminal 3153
Select KBD-IBM-3153

Product Reference Guide

31

Setup

Interface Selection

KEYBOARD — cont.
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals
31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make only keyboard

FEATURES
$P,HA15,P(CR)

Select KBD-IBM-M

$P,HA16,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals
31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make break keyboard

Select KBD-IBM-MB
$P,HA1B,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for DIGITAL Terminals VT2xx, VT3xx, VT4xx
Select KBD-DIG-VT

Set KEYBOARD
WEDGE
Interface
Features
starting on page 55

$P,HA35,P(CR)
USB Keyboard with standard key encoding
Select USB Keyboard
$P,HA2C,P(CR)
USB Keyboard for Apple computers
Select USB-KBD-APPLE

WAND EMULATION

FEATURES
$P,HA24,P(CR)

Set WAND
Interface
Features
starting on page 71

Wand Emulation
(BT only)
Select WAND

32

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Customizing Configuration Settings

Setup

Customizing Configuration Settings
Configure Interface Settings
If after scanning the interface bar code from the previous table, your installation requires you to
select options to further customize your reader, turn to the appropriate section for your interface
type in "Configuration Parameters" starting on page 37.
• "RS-232 Interface" on page 41
• "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
• "Keyboard Settings" on page 55
•
•
•

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
"IBM 46XX Interface" on page 67
"Wand Emulation Interface" on page 71

Global Interface Features
See "Global Interface Features" on page 39 for settings configurable by all interface types.

Configuring Other Features
If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings,
the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-specific settings you
might require:
Reading Parameters: Reading Parameters include programming for scanning, beeper and LED
indicators and other universal settings.
1D Symbologies: Includes options concerning the bar code label types (symbologies). These

settings allow you to enable/disable symbologies, set label lengths, require check digit, etc.
WIRELESS FEATURES: Contains programming options for RF, STAR and Bluetooth models only.

Software Version Transmission
The software version of the device can be transmitted over the RS-232 and Keyboard interfaces
by scanning the following label.
RevA

Transmit Software Version

Product Reference Guide

33

Setup

Customizing Configuration Settings

Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults
Restore Custom Defaults
If you aren’t sure what programming options are in your imager, or you’ve changed some
options and want to restore the Custom Default Configuration that may have been saved in the
scanner, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration bar code below. This will restore the
custom configuration for the currently active interface.
Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager
for the correct interface before scanning this label.

$P,HA00,P(CR)

Restore Custom Default Configuration

Restore Factory Configuration
If you want to restore the Factory Configuration for your imager, scan either the Restore USA
Factory Configuration bar code or the Restore EU Factory Configuration bar code below. Both
labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings, including the interface type. The
USA label restores Label IDs to those historically used in the USA. The EU label restores Label
IDs to those historically used in Europe. The Label ID sets for USA and EU are shown in the
“Label ID Control” section on page 81 of this manual.

$P,AE,P(CR)

Restore USA Factory Configuration

$P,Ae,P(CR)

Restore EU Factory Configuration

The programming items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for
each of the menu commands.

34

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Customizing Configuration Settings

Setup

Replacing the Battery
Before replacing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" starting on page 14. Datalogic recommends
annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

To change the battery of your reader, complete the following instructions.
1. With a screwdriver, unscrew the battery cover screw.

2. Unscrew and remove the three screws securing the battery holder, and unplug the white
connector.

Connector

Screw

Screw

3. Carefully lift out the gold contacts circuit, and remove the battery holder while letting the
white connector pass through the hole in the battery holder (as shown in the picture
below).

Pass-through
hole
Gold
contacts
circuit

Product Reference Guide

35

Setup

Customizing Configuration Settings
4. Remove the old battery from its place (if present), and insert the new battery in the same
position.
5. Replace the battery holder and three screws, plug in the connector, and return the contacts
circuit to its previous location.
When inserting the new battery into the handle, take care to position the battery
and the connector as shown.

6. Insert the cover in the handle and screw it back into place.

Battery replacement is now complete.

36

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 3
Configuration Using Bar Codes
This and following sections provide programming bar codes to configure your reader by
changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming, see
"Configuration Methods" on page 16.
You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use this
section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and
complete the appropriate procedure.

Configuration Parameters
Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your application needs.
Refer to "Standard Defaults" starting on page 303 for initial configuration in order to set the
default values and select the interface for your application.
The following configuration parameters are divided into logical groups, making it easy to find
the desired function based on its reference group.

Interface Configuration:
•
•

"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
"Keyboard Settings" on page 55

Parameters common to all interface applications:
•
•

"Data Format" on page 75 gives options to control the messages sent to the Host system.
"Reading Parameters" on page 89 control various operating modes and indicators status
functioning.

Symbology-specific parameters:
•
•

"1D Symbologies" on page 111 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 1D codes,
code families and their options.
"2D Symbologies" on page 203 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 2D codes,
code families and their options.

You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use this
section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and
complete the appropriate procedure.

Product Reference Guide

37

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

To program features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code, available at the top of each programming page, when applicable.
2. Scan the bar code to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover unused
bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only
the bar code you intend to scan.
3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the
appropriate characters from the keypad.
Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.
For more detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting selected
configuration items, see References, starting on page 255.

By default, the handheld will decode bar code labels only when they are
close to the center of the aiming pattern. This allows the handheld to accurately target labels when they are placed close together, such as on a pick
sheet. See Pick Mode, starting on page 100.

38

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global Interface Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES
The following interface features are configurable by all interface types.

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set to
ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except for those necessary for:
• service mode
• flash programming mode
• keeping the interface active
• transmission of labels.

$CIFIH00(CR)

DEFAULT
Host Commands = Obey
(Do Not Ignore Host Commands)
$CIFIH01(CR)

Host Commands = Ignore

USB Suspend Mode
This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.

$CUSSE00(CR)

DEFAULT
USB Suspend Mode = Disable
$CUSSE01(CR)

USB Suspend Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide

39

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Global Interface Features

NOTES

40

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 INTERFACE

BAUD RATE on page 42
DATA BITS on page 43
STOP BITS on page 43
PARITY on page 44
HANDSHAKING CONTROL on page 45
Use the programming bar codes in this section if modifications to the standard RS-232 interface settings are
necessary to meet your system’s requirements. Additional settings which apply to both the RS-232 and USB
interfaces are available in the next section, "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" starting on page 46.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232 Interface

Baud Rate
See page 256 for information on this feature.
$CR2BA00(CR)

Baud Rate = 1200
$CR2BA01(CR)

Baud Rate = 2400
$CR2BA02(CR)

Baud Rate = 4800
$CR2BA03(CR)

DEFAULT
Baud Rate = 9600
$CR2BA04(CR)

Baud Rate = 19,200
$CR2BA05(CR)

Baud Rate = 38,400
$CR2BA06(CR)

Baud Rate = 57,600
$CR2BA07(CR)

Baud Rate = 115,200

42

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Interface

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Bits
This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol for sending and
receiving data.

$CR2DA00(CR)

7 Data Bits
$CR2DA01(CR)

DEFAULT
8 Data Bits

Stop Bits
Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. See page 256 for more information on this feature.
$CR2ST00(CR)

DEFAULT
1 Stop Bit

$CR2ST01(CR)

2 Stop Bits

Product Reference Guide

43

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232 Interface

Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Select the parity type according to host device
requirements. See page 256 for more information.

$CR2PA00(CR)

DEFAULT
Parity = None
$CR2PA01(CR)

Parity = Even
$CR2PA02(CR)

Parity = Odd

44

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Interface

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Handshaking Control
See page 256 for more information about this feature.

$CR2HC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Handshaking Control = RTS
$CR2HC01(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS
$CR2HC02(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/XON/XOFF
$CR2HC03(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS On/CTS
$CR2HC04(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS Scan Control

Product Reference Guide

45

RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 47
BEEP ON ASCII BEL on page 47
BEEP ON NOT ON FILE on page 48
ACK NAK OPTIONS on page 49
ACK CHARACTER on page 50
NAK CHARACTER on page 50
ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 51
ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 51
ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING on page 52
INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE on page 52
DISABLE CHARACTER on page 53
ENABLE CHARACTER on page 53

The programming bar codes in this chapter allow modifications to the standard RS-232 and USB-Com interfaces.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next.
The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies
no delay.
See page 265 for more information.

$CR2IC00(CR)

Intercharacter Delay = No Delay

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CR2IC

Select Intercharacter Delay Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

00 = No Intercharacter Delay

Beep On ASCII BEL
When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a  character is detected on the RS-232 serial
line.  is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.
$CR2BB00(CR)

DEFAULT
Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable
$CR2BB01(CR)

Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

Product Reference Guide

47

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Beep On Not on File
This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence upon receiving a Not-On-File
(NOF) host command.

$CBPNF00(CR)

Beep On Not On File = Disable
$CBPNF01(CR)

DEFAULT
Beep On Not On File = Enable

48

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. 
See page 258 for more information.

$CR2AE00(CR)

DEFAULT
ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK
$CR2AE01(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission
$CR2AE02(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command
acknowledge
$CR2AE03(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and
host-command acknowledge

Product Reference Guide

49

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex
value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 258 for more information.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal
operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as
7 Data Bits.

$CR2AC

Select ACK Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x06 ‘ACK’ Character

NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex
value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 259 for more information.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal
operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as
7 Data Bits.

$CR2NA

Select NAK Character Setting

DEFAULT

50

0x15 ‘NAK’ Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label
transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A
selection of 0 disables the timeout.
See page 260 for more information on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CR2AT

Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms

ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The
selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies
unlimited retries. See page 261 for more information.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CR2AR

Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

003 = 3 Retries

51

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

ACK NAK Error Handling
This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected while waiting for an ACK
character from the host.

$CR2EH00(CR)

DEFAULT
ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected
$CR2EH01(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK
Character
$CR2EH02(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as
Valid NAK Character

Indicate Transmission Failure
This option enables/disables the reader’s ability to sound an error beep to indicate a transmission failure while in
ACK/NAK mode.

$CR2TF00(CR)

Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication
$CR2TF01(CR)

DEFAULT
Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication

52

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with
normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits
has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 262 for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2DC

Select Disable Character Setting

DEFAULT

0x44 = Disable Character is ‘D’

Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with
normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits
has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 263 in “References” for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2EC

Select Enable Character Setting

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

0x45 = Enable Character is ‘E’

53

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces

NOTES

54

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

KEYBOARD SETTINGS
COUNTRY MODE on page 56
SEND CONTROL CHARACTERS on page 60
WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL on page 61
INTERCODE DELAY on page 61
CAPS LOCK STATE on page 62
NUMLOCK on page 62
USB KEYBOARD SPEED on page 63
USB KEYBOARD NUMERIC KEYPAD on page 64
Use the programming bar codes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and Wedge Interfaces.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Information about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed in Appendix E,
Scancode Tables.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Keyboard Settings

Country Mode
This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard. Several languages are supported:

$CKBCO00(CR)

DEFAULT
Country Mode = U.S.
$CKBCO01(CR)

Country Mode = Belgium
$CKBCO02(CR)

Country Mode = Britain

$CKBCO11(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Croatia

$CKBCO0E(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Czech Republic
$CKBCO03(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Denmark

56

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode (Continued)
$CKBCO04(CR)

Country Mode = France

$CKBCO13(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = French Canadian

$CKBCO05(CR)

Country Mode = Germany

$CKBCO0D(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Hungary

$CKBCO06(CR)

Country Mode = Italy
$CKBCO0C(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Japanese 106-key

Product Reference Guide

57

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Keyboard Settings

Country Mode (Continued)
$CKBCO14(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Lithuanian

$CKBCO07(CR)

Country Mode = Norway

$CKBCO12(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Poland

$CKBCO08(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Portugal

$CKBCO10(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Romania

$CKBCO0F(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Slovakia

58

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

$CKBCO09(CR)

Country Mode = Spain
$KBCO0A(CR)

Country Mode = Sweden
$CKBCO0B(CR)

Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country
Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Switzerland

Product Reference Guide

59

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Keyboard Settings

Send Control Characters
This feature specifies how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference Appendix E,
Scancode Tables for more information about control characters.
Options are as follows:
Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located
from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Shift, special keys are located
from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as
an extended ASCII table (see "Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252" on page 329).

$CKBSC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Wedge Send Control Characters = 00
$CKBSC01(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 01
$CKBSC02(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 02

60

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wedge Quiet Interval
Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to
transmit data to host. The selectable range for this setting is 00 to 990 milliseconds (00-0x63 by 01) in increments
of ten milliseconds. See page 264 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CKBQI

Set Wedge Quiet Interval

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then
start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

0A = Quiet Interval is
100 milliseconds

DEFAULT
Intercode Delay

Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is
from 0 to 99 seconds.
See page 266 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CKBID

Set Intercode Delay

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then
start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay

61

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Keyboard Settings

Caps Lock State
This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This does not apply when an alternate
key encoding keyboard is selected.
$CKBCL00(CR)

DEFAULT
Caps Lock State = Caps Lock OFF
$CKBCL01(CR)

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON
$CKBCL02(CR)

Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable

Numlock
This option specifies the setting of the NUMLOCK key in the Keyboard Wedge interface.
$CKBNL00(CR)

DEFAULT
Numlock = NUMLOCK key unchanged
$CKBNL01(CR)

Numlock = Numlock key toggled

62

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Settings

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB Keyboard Speed
This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB keyboard.
This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

$CKBSP01(CR)

DEFAULT
USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms
$CKBSP02(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 2ms
$CKBSP03(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms
$CKBSP04(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 4ms
$CKBSP05(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms
$CKBSP06(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms

Product Reference Guide

63

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Keyboard Settings

USB Keyboard Speed — continued
$CKBSP07(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms
$CKBSP08(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms
$CKBSP09(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms
$CKBSP0A(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad
This option Controls whether numeric characters will be sent using standard keys or the numeric keypad.

$CKBKP00(CR)

DEFAULT
Standard Keys
$CKBKP01(CR)

Numeric Keypad

64

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

USB-OEM INTERFACE
USB-OEM DEVICE USAGE on page 66
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 66

Feature settings for USB interfaces differ depending upon which host type the reader will be connected with.
Use the feature settings in this chapter and "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 67 to specifically configure for the
USB-OEM interface. Other USB interfaces are included in the appropriate chapter for their host type.
Reference Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB-OEM Interface

USB-OEM Device Usage
The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of bar code scanners.
Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB-OEM POS, you may need to change
this setting to enable all devices to communicate.
Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner
It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two readers/scanners of the same
type to a POS system.

$CIBUT00(CR)

USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner
$CIBUT01(CR)

DEFAULT
USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner

Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.
$CIFO101(CR)

Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
$CIFO102(CR)

DEFAULT
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

66

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM 46XX INTERFACE

46XX NUMBER OF HOST RESETS on page 68
TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT on page 70
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 70
Use the bar codes in this section to configure programmable features for available IBM 46XX
interfaces.
Reference Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide

67

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

IBM 46XX Interface

46xx Number of Host Resets
Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the reader starts a five-second period
to allow the user to enter Programming Mode and configure the reader. The configurable range
for this feature is 1 to 15 resets.

$CIBHR01(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 1
$CIBHR02(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 2
$CIBHR03(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 3
$CIBHR04(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 4
$CIBHR05(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 5
$CIBHR06(CR)

DEFAULT
46xx Number of Host Resets = 6
$CIBHR07(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 7

68

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM 46XX Interface

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

46xx Number of Host Resets — cont.
$CIBHR08(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 8
$CIBHR09(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 9
$CIBHR0A(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 10
$CIBHR0B(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 11
$CIBHR0C(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 12
$CIBHR0D(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 13
$CIBHR0E(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 14
$CIBHR0F(CR)

46xx Number of Host Resets = 15

Product Reference Guide

69

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

IBM 46XX Interface

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enable/disables translation to Code 39 before transmitting label data to an IBM46XX or a USB-OEM host. Only the symbology identifier is modified for the translation. The
data is not converted to Code 39 or verified to be valid for Code 39.
Options are:
IBM Standard Format: Send labels in standard IBM format.
Code 39 Format: Translate the following symbologies to Code 39:

• USB-OEM: Code128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 5B: Code 128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 9B: Code 93 and Codabar
$CIBC300(CR)

DEFAULT
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format =
IBM Standard Format
$CIBC301(CR)

Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Code 39 Format

Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.

$CIFO101(CR)

Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
$CIFO102(CR)

DEFAULT
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

70

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

WAND EMULATION INTERFACE
This feature is valid only for the GBT4400 model.

WAND SIGNAL SPEED on page 72
WAND POLARITY on page 72
WAND IDLE STATE on page 73
TRANSMIT NOISE on page 73
LABEL SYMBOLOGY CONVERSION on page 74
This chapter provides feature/settings configuration for the Wand Emulation interface.
Reference Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide

71

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wand Emulation Interface

Wand Signal Speed
This feature specifies the speed of the Wand output signal per nominal bar or space. Choices
are:
• 330 microseconds
• 660 microseconds

$CWASP00(CR)

Wand Signal Speed = 330ms
$CWASP01(CR)

DEFAULT
Wand Signal Speed = 660ms

Wand Polarity
This option specifies the polarity of the Wand output signal. Choices are:
• Quiet zones and spaces are high, bars are low
• Quiet zones and spaces are low, bars are high

TTL logic levels:
0V <= Low <= 0.7V
2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

$CWAPO00(CR)

Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low
$CWAPO01(CR)

DEFAULT
Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces Low, Bars High

72

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wand Emulation Interface

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wand Idle State
This feature specifies the level of the Wand output signal when the reader is idle.
TTL logic levels:
0V <= Low <= 0.7V
2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

$CWAID00(CR)

Wand Idle State = Low
$CWAID01(CR)

DEFAULT
Wand Idle State = High

Transmit Noise
This option specifies the leading/trailing noise for the Wand interface.

$CWATN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Transmit Noise = Disable
$CWATN01(CR)

Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise
$CWATN02(CR)

Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise
$CWATN03(CR)

Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise

Product Reference Guide

73

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wand Emulation Interface

Label Symbology Conversion
When this feature is enabled for the Wand Emulation interface, all bar code labels are converted
to a single symbology.
Options are:
• No conversion
• Convert to Code 39 symbology
• Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
• Convert to Code 128 symbology

$CWASC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Label Symbology Conversion = No conversion
$CWASC01(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39
$CWASC03(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion =
Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
$CWASC02(CR)

Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 128

74

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

DATA FORMAT
GLOBAL PREFIX/SUFFIX starting on page 76
GLOBAL AIM ID starting on page 77
LABEL ID starting on page 80
•Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets
•Individually Set Label ID
•Label ID Control
•Label ID Symbology Selection
•Label ID Symbology Selection

• 1D Symbologies
• 2D Symbologies

CASE CONVERSION starting on page 87
CHARACTER CONVERSION starting on page 88

It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

CAUTION
The features in this chapter can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message
string. See “References” starting on page 268 for more detailed instructions on setting these
features.

Product Reference Guide

75

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Global Prefix/Suffix

Global Prefix/Suffix
This option sets up to 20 characters each from the set of ASCII characters or any hex value from
00 to FF. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data, also
called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data, also called a footer).
See page 269 for more detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above
to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Global Prefix” or “Set Global Suffix,”
bar code followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,
Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters
are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. Exit programming mode
by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CLFPR

Set Global Prefix
$CLFSU

Set Global Suffix

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

76

No Global Prefix
Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global AIM ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Global AIM ID
This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. See Table 2 on page 3-77 for a listing of
AIM IDs.
AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see some samples in the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

$CAIEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Global AIM ID = Disable
$CAIEN01(CR)

Global AIM ID = Enable

Table 2. AIM IDs
Tag Name
ABC CODABAR
ANKER PLESSEY
AZTEC
CHINA SENSIBLE CODE
CODABAR
CODE11
CODE128
CODE32
CODE39
CODE39 CIP
CODE39 DANISH PPT
CODE39 LAPOSTE
CODE39 PZN
CODE93
DATABAR 14
DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE
DATABAR EXPANDED

Product Reference Guide

AIM ID code
character
X
N
z
X
F
H
C
A
A
X
X
X
X
G
e
e
e

AIM ID code
ASCII value
58
4E
7A
58
46
48
43
41
41
58
58
58
58
47
65
65
65

77

Enter/Exit Programming Mode
DATABAR EXPANDED
COMPOSITE
DATABAR LIMITED
DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE
DATA MATRIX
EAN128
EAN128 COMPOSITE
EAN13
EAN13 P2
EAN13 P5
EAN13 COMPOSITE
EAN8
EAN8 P2
EAN8 P5
EAN8 COMPOSITE
FOLLET 2OF5
I2OF5
IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5
INDUSTRIAL 2OF5
ISBN
ISBT128 CONCAT
ISSN
MAXICODE
MICRO QR
MICRO PDF
MSI
PDF417
PLESSEY
POSTAL AUSTRALIAN
POSTAL IMB
POSTAL JAPANESE
POSTAL KIX
POSTAL PLANET
POSTAL PORTUGAL
POSTAL POSTNET BB
POSTAL ROYAL MAIL
POSTAL SWEDISH
POSTNET
QR CODE
S25
TRIOPTIC
UPCA
UPCA P2
UPCA P5
UPCA COMPOSITE
UPCE
UPCE P2
UPCE P5
UPCE COMPOSITE

78

Global AIM ID
e
e
e
d
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
X
I
X
X
X
X
X
U
Q
L
M
L
P
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Q
S
X
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

65
65
65
64
43
43
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
58
49
58
58
58
58
58
55
51
4C
4D
4C
50
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
51
53
58
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Global AIM ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128
This feature configures a Label ID individually for the GS1-128 symbology and the
programming for this works the same way as Label ID. See Label ID: Set Individually Per
Symbology, starting on page 274 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CU8AI00(CR)

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Disable
$CU8AI01(CR)

DEFAULT
Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Enable

Product Reference Guide

79

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (convert to Hex using the
ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual), used to identify a bar code symbology
type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon
how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs or
individually per symbology (see "Individually Set Label ID" on page 81). If you wish to
program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology
types, see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 77.
See Label ID, starting on page 271 of “References” for more information on setting this feature.

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. See Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on
page 271 for details on the USA set and EU set.

CAUTION

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader
configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be
erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

$AE(CR)

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set
$Ae(CR)

DEFAULT
Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set

80

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Individually Set Label ID
This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology. To set, first define
whether you want it as a prefix or suffix by scanning a label below. Then turn to Label ID
Symbology Selection • 1D Symbologies, starting on page 82 to select the symbology you want
to set, followed by up to 3 characters from the ASCII Chart at the back of this manual. See
"Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 274 for detailed instructions on setting this
feature.

Label ID Control
This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a given
symbology type.
$CIDCO00(CR)

DEFAULT
Label ID Transmission = Disable
$CIDCO01(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix
$CIDCO02(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix

Product Reference Guide

81

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies
This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID" on
page 80 or page 274 in “References” for more detailed instructions.
If less than the expected string of 3 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/
EXIT bar code twice to accept the selection and exit Programming Mode.

$CACID

Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)
$CALID

Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)
$CPAID

Set Australian Postal Code Label ID Character(s)
$CCBID

Set Codabar Label ID Character(s)
$CC1ID

Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s)
$CC8ID

Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)
$CC3ID

Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

82

$CP3ID

Set Code 32 Pharmacode Label ID Character(s)
$CC9ID

Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)
$CI8ID

Set Concatenated ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)
$CDPID

Set Danish PPT Label ID Character(s)
$C3BID

Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)
$C3MID

Set EAN 13 Composite Label ID Character(s)
$C32ID

Set EAN 13 P2 Label ID Character(s)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)
$CCCID

Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s)

$C8BID

Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s)

$C8MID

Set EAN 8 Composite Label ID Character(s)
$C82ID

Set EAN 8 P2 Label ID Character(s)
$C85ID

Set EAN 8 P5 Label ID Character(s)
$CF2ID

Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
$C4BID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Label ID Character(s)
$C4CID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Composite Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide

$C35ID

Set EAN 13 P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CXCID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite
Label ID Character(s)
$CU8ID

Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
$CUMID

Set GS1-128 Composite Label ID Character(s)
$CLBID

Set GSI DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)
$CLCID

GSI DataBar Limited Composite Label ID Character(s)
$CG2ID

Set GTIN 2 Label ID Character(s)
$CG5ID

Set GTIN 5 Label ID Character(s)

83

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)
$CXBID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)

$CIAID

Set IATA Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
$CPMID

Set IMB Postal Code Label ID Character(s)
$CU2ID

Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
$CI2ID

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
$CISID

Set ISBN Label ID Character(s)
$CINID

Set ISSN Label ID Character(s)
$CPJID

Set Japan Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

84

$CGBID

Set GTIN 8 Label ID Character(s)
$CLPID

Set LaPoste Code 39 Label ID Character(s)
$CMSID

Set MSI Label ID Character(s)
$CPPID

Set Planet Postal Code Label ID Character(s)
$CPLID

Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)
$CPGID

Set Portugal Postal Code Label ID Character(s)
$CPNID

Set Postnet Label ID Character(s)
$CPKID

Set Kix Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)
$CPZID

Set PZN Code Label ID Character(s)

$CPBID

Set Postnet BB Label ID Character(s)

$CPRID

$CAMID

Set Royal Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

Set UPC-A Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CS2ID

$CA2ID

Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
$CPSID

Set Swedish Postal Code Label ID Character(s)
$CCTID

Set Trioptic Code Label ID Character(s)
$CABID

Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide

Set UPC-A P2 Label ID Character(s)
$CA5ID

Set UPC-A P5 Label ID Character(s)
$CEBID

Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)
$CE5ID

Set UPC-E P5 Label ID Character(s)

85

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Label ID Symbology Selection − 2D Symbologies
$CAZID

Set Aztec Label ID Character(s)
$CCSID

Set China Sensible Label ID Character(s)
$CDMID

Set Data Matrix Label ID Character(s)
$CMQID

Set Micro QR Label ID Character(s)

86

$CMXID

Set Maxicode Label ID Character(s)
$CP4ID

Set PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)
$CMIID

Set Micro PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)
$CQRID

Set QR Code Label ID Character(s)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Label ID

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit
Advanced formatting is available to create user label edit scripts. See the Datalogic Aladdin
configuration application or contact Technical Support.

Case Conversion
This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.
Case conversion affects ONLY scanned bar code data, and does not affect Label
ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

$CLFCA00(CR)

DEFAULT
Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)
$CLFCA01(CR)

Case Conversion = Convert to upper case
$CLFCA02(CR)

Case Conversion = Convert to lower case

Product Reference Guide

87

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID

Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs
represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will
be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to
convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/
EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

$CLFCH

Configure Character Conversion

DEFAULT

88

0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(No character conversion)

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

READING PARAMETERS
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT starting on page 90
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS starting on page 92
•Power On Alert
•Good Read: When to Indicate
•Good Read Beep Type
•Good Read Beep Frequency
•Good Read Beep Length
•Good Read Beep Volume
•Good Read LED Duration

SCANNING FEATURES starting on page 97
•Scan Mode
•Stand Mode Indication
•Stand Operation
•Pick Mode
•Stand Mode Sensitivity
•Stand Mode Illumination Off Time
•Scanning Active Time
•Stand Illumination Control
•Flash On Time
•Flash Off Time
•Aiming Pointer
•Aiming Duration Timer
•Green Spot Duration
•Mobile Phone Mode
•Partial Label Reading Control
•Decode Negative Image
•Image Capture

CORDED ONLY FEATURES starting on page 107
•Corded
•Corded

Stand Mode
Stand Beep

MULTIPLE LABEL READING starting on page 109
•Multiple
•Multiple
•Multiple

Product Reference Guide

Labels per Frame
Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
Labels Ordering by Code Length

89

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Double Read Timeout
Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum time
allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads a label and
sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is ignored. Double Read
Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label read.

$CSNDR0A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second
$CSNDR14(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second
$CSNDR1E(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second
$CSNDR28(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second
$CSNDR32(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second
$CSNDR3C(CR)

DEFAULT
Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second
$CSNDR46(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second

90

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Double Read Timeout — continued
$CSNDR50(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second
$CSNDR5A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.9 Second
$CSNDR64(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

Product Reference Guide

91

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS
Power On Alert
Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.

$CBPPU00(CR)

Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)
$CBPPU01(CR)

DEFAULT
Power On Alert = Power-up Beep

Good Read: When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED)
upon successfully reading a bar code.

$CBPIN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Indicate Good Read = After Decode
$CBPIN01(CR)

Indicate Good Read = After Transmit
$CBPIN02(CR)

Indicate Good Read =
After CTS goes inactive then active

92

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Type
Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.

$CBPTY00(CR)

DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Type = Mono
$CBPTY01(CR)

Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal

Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency, selectable
from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/tone.)

$CBPFR00(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Low
$CBPFR01(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium
$CBPFR02(CR)

DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Frequency = High

Product Reference Guide

93

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Good Read Beep Length
$CBPLE06(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec
$CBPLE08(CR)

DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec
$CBPLE0A(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec
$CBPLE0C(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec
$CBPLE0E(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec
$CBPLE10(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec
$CBPLE12(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec
$CBPLE14(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec

94

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three selectable volume
levels.

$CBPVO00CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off
$CBPVO01CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Low
$CBPVO02CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Medium
$CBPVO03CR)

DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Volume = High

Product Reference Guide

95

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good
read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 100 milliseconds to 25,500
milliseconds (0.1 to 25.5 seconds) in 100ms increments. A setting of 00 keeps the LED on until
the next trigger pull.
See page 277 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.

$CLAGL00(CR)

Good Read LED Duration Setting =
Keep LED on until next trigger pull
$CLAGL

Select Good Read LED Duration Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.
~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

003 = Good Read LED
stays on for 300 ms.

Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

96

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

SCANNING FEATURES
Scan Mode
Selects the reader’s scan operating mode. See page 278 in “References” for descriptions.
$CSNRM00(CR)

DEFAULT
Scan Mode = Trigger Single

$CSNRM01(CR)

Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple
$CSNRM02(CR)

Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple
$CSNRM03(CR

Scan Mode = Flashing
$CSNRM04(CR)

Scan Mode = Always On
$CSNRM05(CR

Scan Mode = Stand Mode

Options concerning Stand Mode behavior are available at the following
feature, Stand Operation.

Product Reference Guide

97

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Stand Mode Indication
This operation is useful for indicating when the reader is in Stand Mode. If enabled, the blue
indicator will blink when Stand Mode scanning is active. If reader detects motion (or removed
from base station for cordless models) and switches out of Stand Mode into Triggered Mode,
blinking will stop until Stand Mode is active again.
$CSMFL00(CR)

DEFAULT
Stand Mode Indication = Disable
$CSMFL01(CR)

Stand Mode Indication = Enable

98

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Operation
Specifies the behavior of the reader when stationary in a stand. There are two conditions which
cause the reader to switch to Stand Mode:
1. The reader is configured to switch to Stand Mode when stationary.
2. The reader is placed into the cradle of the base station.
Below are further options concerning Stand Operation.
Ignore Autorecognition. Disables mode switching when the reader is placed in a stand.
Switch to Stand Mode. Automatically switches the reader to Stand Mode when the reader is
placed in the stand.
Switch to Flashing. Automatically switches the reader to Flash Mode when the reader is placed
in the stand.
Switch to Always On. Automatically switches the reader to Always On mode when the reader is
placed in the stand.
$CSMSD00(
CR)
Do Not Change Mode
$CSMSD01(
CR)
Change to Stand Mode

DEFAULT
$CSMSD02(CR)

Change to Always On
$CSMSD03(CR)

Change to Flashing

Product Reference Guide

99

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Pick Mode
Specifies the ability of the reader to decode labels only when they are close to the center of the
aiming pattern. This allows the reader to accurately target labels when they are placed close
together, such as on a pick sheet.
This feature is not compatible with Multiple Labels Reading in a Volume.

$CSNPM00(CR)

DEFAULT
Pick Mode = Disable
$CSNPM01(CR)

Pick Mode = Enable

Stand Mode Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup. Choices are low, medium and high.
$CSMSE00(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = Low
$CSMSE01(CR)

DEFAULT
Stand Mode Sensitivity = Medium
$CSMSE02(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = High

100

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time
Specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when in Stand
Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds).
See page 279 in “References” for a description of this feature.

$CSNTM

Select Stand Mode Time Setting

DEFAULT

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

04 = 2 Seconds

Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is
entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See
page 280 in “References” for further description of this feature.
$CSNET03(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 3 seconds
$CSNET05(CR)

DEFAULT
Scanning Active Time = 5 seconds
$CSNET08(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 8 seconds

Product Reference Guide

101

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Stand Illumination Control
Controls the illumination status while the reading mode is stand mode and the reader is
attempting to detect objects.
$CSMIL00(CR)

DEFAULT
Stand Illumination Control = OFF
$CSMIL01(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = ON
$CSMIL02(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = Dim

Motion Still Timeout
Motion Still Timeout specifies the waiting time after which no motions is detected. When no
motion is detected for period of time longer than the set Motion Still Timeout period, the
scanner assumes it is in a motionless condition. The selectable setting are from 500 to 25,500
milliseconds in 100 millisecond increments. The default is 2 seconds. This option relates to
such features and the Aimer On timing and Stand Mode Object Sense scanning with respect to
motion. See page 289 in "References" for detailed information on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMOTO/r

Select Motion Still Timeout Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

102

14 = Motion Still Timeout for 2 seconds

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See
page 282 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CSNFN

Select Flash ON Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second

Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See
page 283 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CSNFF

Select Flash OFF Time Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

103

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Aiming Pointer
Enables/disables the aiming pointer for all symbologies.
$CTAAP00(CR)

Aiming Pointer = Disable
$CTAAP01(CR)

DEFAULT
Aiming Pointer = Enable

Aiming Duration Timer
Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger
single mode.The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See
page 281 in “References” for a description of this feature.

LSTM00

DEFAULT
Aiming Off After Decoding
LSTM

Set Aiming Duration Timer
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING
MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters
in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired
character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code.
~

CANCEL

104

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Green Spot Duration
Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.
$CLSSP00(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off )
$CLSSP01(CR)

DEFAULT
Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)

$CLSSP02(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)
$CLSSP03(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)

Mobile Phone Mode
This mode is useful for scanning bar codes displayed on a mobile phone. Other options for this
feature can be configured using the Datalogic Aladdin application.
$CSNPE00(CR)

Mobile Phone Mode = Disable
$CSNPE01(CR)

DEFAULT
Mobile Phone Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide

105

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Partial Label Reading Control
Enable/Disable to ignore partial labels to be read within the boundary of the field of view.
IPPL00

Partial Label Reading Control = Disable
IPPL01

Partial Label Reading Control = Enable

Decode Negative Image
Enable/Disable the ability to decode a negative image for all symbologies. When this feature is
enabled, you will be unable to read normally-printed labels or programming labels in this
manual. Scan the “Disable” bar code below to return the scanner to its default for this feature.
To set decoding for only 2D codes, go to 2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control" on page 205.
For additional options, see the Aladdin configuration application.
Unlike some programming features and options, Decode Negative Image selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT scan
an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning a Decode Negative Image bar code.

When this feature is enabled, you will be unable to read other programming
labels in this manual.

CAUTION
$P,CIPVR00,P(CR)

DEFAULT
Decode Negative Image = Disable
$P,CIPVR01,P(CR)

Decode Negative Image = Enable

Image Capture
For information and a list of options for Image Capture, use the Datalogic Aladdin
configuration application, available for free download from the Datalogic Scanning website.

106

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CORDED ONLY FEATURES
Corded Stand Mode
Sets the Stand Mode Operation for Corded models
This feature is available starting with firmware release 610001013.

$CSMVS00(CR)

DEFAULT
Corded Stand Mode = Disable
$CSMVS01(CR)

Corded Stand Mode = Generic Stand
$CSMVS02(CR)

Corded Stand Mode = for All-in-one and Base
$CSMVS03(CR)

Corded Stand Mode = Precise Stand

Product Reference Guide

107

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Reading Parameters

Corded Stand Beep
Enables/Disables the beep that indicates when Corded Stand position is detected.
This feature is available starting on firmware release 610001013.

$CBPVS00(CR)

DEFAULT
Corded Stand Beep = Disable
$CBPVS01(CR)

Corded Stand Beep = Enable

108

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

MULTIPLE LABEL READING
In standard (default) mode, when the reader’s aiming system is activated (by a trigger pull,
motion or other method depending on the mode), it then acquires and processes each image in
the area in front of it (the Volume). In this case, the scanner stops processing the image once it
decodes a label. If several labels are present in the volume, only the first label encountered is
decoded and sent.
When Multiple Reading Mode is enabled, the scanner keeps on processing the image until all
the labels present are decoded. The reader then sorts the data from all the bar codes (if
configured to do so) before transmitting it.

Multiple Labels per Frame
Specifies the ability of the reader to decode and transmit a set of code labels in a specific volume
and in a single frame of time. When in Multiple Labels per Frame the reader beeps and turns on
the good read LED indication for each code read in a frame.
When Multiple Labels Mode is enabled, ISBT pairing, ABC Codabar pairing, and composites
are not allowed.
$CSNML00(CR)

DEFAULT
Multiple Labels per Frame = Disable
$CSNML01(CR)

Multiple Labels per Frame = Enable

Product Reference Guide

109

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
This feature allows you to specify the order multiple labels are transmitted by symbology type,
when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled. See page 284 in “References” for detailed
information on setting this feature.

$CSNMS

Select Symbologies for Multiple Labels Ordering

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits From the alphanumeric
characters In Appendix d, keypad representing your
desired Character(s). end by scanning the enter/exit bar
code again.
~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

000000000000 = Random order

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length
Specifies the transmission ordering by code length, when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled.
$CSNMT00(CR)

DEFAULT
Multiple Labels Ordering = Disable
$CSNMT01(CR)

Transmit Increasing Length Order

110

$CSNMT02(CR)

Transmit Decreasing Length Order

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

1D SYMBOLOGIES
1D Code Selection
The reader supports the following 1D symbologies (bar code types). See "2D Symbologies"
starting on page 203 for 2D bar codes. Symbology-dependent options are included in each
chapter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Disable All Symbologies, page 112
Code EAN/UPC, page 113
UPC-E, page 116
GTIN Formatting, page 119
EAN 13 (Jan 13), page 120
ISSN, page 122
EAN 8 (Jan 8), page 123
UPC/EAN Global Settings, page 125
Add-Ons, page 127
Code 39, page 134
Trioptic Code, page 140
Code 32 (Ital Pharmaceutical Code), page 140
Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical), page 142
Code 39 Danish PPT, page 142
Code 39 LaPoste, page 143
Code 39 PZN, page 143
Code 128, page 144

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

GS1-128, page 150
Code ISBT 128, page 151
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5), page 154
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR, page 159
Follett 2 of 5, page 159
Standard 2 of 5, page 160
Industrial 2 of 5, page 164
Code IATA, page 168
Codabar, page 169
ABC Codabar, page 175
Code 11, page 178
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional, page 182
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded, page 183
GS1 DataBar™ Limited, page 188
Code 93, page 189
MSI, page 194
Plessey, page 199

Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference
Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory
settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or implemented
for your system.
To set most features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.
2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may
need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that
the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the
appropriate characters from the keypad.
Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

Product Reference Guide

111

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Disable All Symbologies

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES
Use this feature to disable all symbologies.
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING Mode bar code.
2. Scan the Disable All Symbologies bar code.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code.

$AD(CR)

Disable All Symbologies

This does not disable the reading of programming labels.

112

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code EAN/UPC

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE EAN/UPC
Coupon Control
This feature is used to control the reader’s method of processing coupon labels.
$CCPLC00(CR)

Coupon Control = Allow all coupon bar codes to be
decoded
$CCPLC01(CR)

DEFAULT
Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding
$CCPLC02(CR)

Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar™
coupon decoding

Product Reference Guide

113

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code EAN/UPC

UPC-A
The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.

UPC-A Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A bar codes.
$CABEN00(CR)

UPC-A = Disable
$CABEN01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A bar code data.

$CABCT00(CR)

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CABCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send

114

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code EAN/UPC

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CAB3B00(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand
$CAB3B01(CR)

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.

$CABNS00(CR)

UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit
$CABNS01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

Product Reference Guide

115

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E

UPC-A 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label of this symbology is decoded.

$CAB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN-13 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$CAB2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

UPC-E
The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.

UPC-E Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E bar codes.

$CEBEN00(CR)

UPC-E = Disable
$CEBEN01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E = Enable

116

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UPC-E

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E bar code data.
$CEBCT00(CR)

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CEBCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send

UPC-E 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label for this symbology is decoded.

$CEB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$CEB2D01(CR)

UPC-E 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

Product Reference Guide

117

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CEB3B00(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand
$CEB3B01(CR)

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format.

$CEBAB00(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E to UPC-A = Don’t Expand
$CEBAB01(CR)

UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

118

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GTIN Formatting

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E system number character.

$CEBNS00(CR)

UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit
$CEBNS01(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit

GTIN FORMATTING
This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN 8, and EAN 13 labels
into the GTIN 14-character format.
If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to
the converted GTIN label.

$CGBEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
GTIN Formatting = Disable
$CGBEN01(CR)

GTIN Formatting = Enable

Product Reference Guide

119

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 13 (Jan 13)

EAN 13 (JAN 13)
The following options apply to the EAN 13 (Jan 13) symbology.

EAN 13 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 13/JAN 13 bar codes.

$C3BEN00(CR)

EAN 13 = Disable
$C3BEN01(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 13 bar code data.

$C3BCT00(CR)

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$C3BCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send

120

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

EAN 13 (Jan 13)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is the
first character of the label.

$C3BF100(CR)

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit
$C3BF101(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion
This option enables/disables conversion of EAN 13/JAN 13 Bookland labels starting with 978
to ISBN labels.

$C3BIS00(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable
$C3BIS01(CR)

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN

Product Reference Guide

121

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISSN

EAN-13 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label of this symbology is decoded.

$C3B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN-13 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$C3B2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

ISSN
The following options apply to the ISSN symbology.

ISSN Enable/Disable
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN labels.

$C3BIN00(CR)

DEFAULT
ISSN = Disable
$C3BIN01(CR)

ISSN = Enable

122

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

EAN 8 (Jan 8)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 8 (JAN 8)
The following options apply to the EAN 8 (Jan 8) symbology.

EAN 8 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 8/JAN 8 bar codes.

$C8BEN00(CR)

EAN 8 = Disable
$C8BEN01(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN 8 = Enable

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 8 bar code data.

$C8BCT00(CR)

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$C8BCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send

Product Reference Guide

123

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 8 (Jan 8)

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13
Enable this option to expand EAN 8/JAN 8 labels to EAN 13/JAN 13.

$C8B3B00(CR)

DEFAULT
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Disable
$C8B3B01(CR)

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 8 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label for this symbology is decoded.

$C8B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
EAN 8 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$C8B2D01(CR)

EAN 8 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

124

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UPC/EAN Global Settings

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS
This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8
symbologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check
This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
$CPWEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Price Weight Check = Disabled
$CPWEN01(CR)

Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check
$CPWEN02(CR)

Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check
$CPWEN03(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight
check
$CPWEN04(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight
check

Product Reference Guide

125

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC/EAN Global Settings

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for UPC/EAN labels. Quiet zones are blank
areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the
label. The property applies to all EAN-UPC symbologies globally and to the ADDONs.

$CUNLO02(CR)

DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Two Modules
$CUNLO03(CR)

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Three Modules

126

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ADD-ONS
Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.

Optional Add-ons
The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (supplementals):
If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will
transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded
without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on. 
Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader
before optional add-on settings.

$CADO200(CR)

DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable P2
$CADO201(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P2
$CADO500(CR)

DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable P5
$CADO501(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P5
$CADO800(CR)

DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable GS1-128
$CADO801(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable GS1-128

Product Reference Guide

127

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Add-Ons

Optional Add-On Timer
This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment has been
seen and optional add-ons are enabled. (Also see "Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on
page 131.)

$CADOT01(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms
$CADOT02(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms
$CADOT03(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms
$CADOT04(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms
$CADOT05(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms

128

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
$CADOT06(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms
$CADOT07(CR)

DEFAULT
Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms
$CADOT0A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms
$CADOT0C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms
$CADOT0E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms
$CADOT10(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms

Product Reference Guide

129

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Add-Ons

Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
$CADOT12(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms
$CADOT14(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms
$CADOT16(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms
$CADOT18(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms
$CADOT1A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms
$CADOT1C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms
$CADOT1E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms

130

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
This option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear EAN/
UPC part. For UPC/EAN add-ons other than those of that type, see "Optional Add-On
Timer" on page 128.

$CADUT00(CR)

DEFAULT
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable
$CADUT01(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms
$CADUT02(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms
$CADUT03(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms
$CADUT04(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms
$CADUT05(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms

Product Reference Guide

131

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Add-Ons

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
$CADUT06(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms
$CADUT07(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms
$CADUT0A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms
$CADUT0C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms
$CADUT0E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms
$CADUT10(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms

132

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Add-Ons

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
$CADUT12(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms
$CADUT14(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms
$CADUT16(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms
$CADUT18(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms
$CADUT1A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms
$CADUT1C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms
$CADUT1E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms

Product Reference Guide

133

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39

CODE 39
The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.

Code 39 Enable/Disable
$CC3EN00(CR)

Code 39 = Disable
$CC3EN01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check
character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CC3CC00(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate
$CC3CC01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Calculation =
Calculate Std Check
$CC3CC02(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =
Calculate Mod 7 Check

134

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Check Character Calculation — cont.
$CC3CC04(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =
Enable Italian Post Check
$CC3CC08(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation =
Enable Daimler Chrysler Check

Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 bar code data.

$CC3CT00(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CC3CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

Product Reference Guide

135

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

$CC3SS00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission =
Don’t Transmit
$CC3SS01(CR)

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to Code 39 full-ASCII characters.

$CC3FA00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable
$CC3FA01(CR)

Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

136

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas
at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CC3LO02(CR)

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
$CC3LO03(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 39 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 39
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC3LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length
$CC3LC01(CR)

Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

137

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39

Code 39 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50
characters.
Table 3 provides examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 3. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC3L1

Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

138

02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters.
Table 4 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 4. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING .MODE

$CC3L2

Select Code 39 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

139

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Trioptic Code

TRIOPTIC CODE
The following options apply to the Trioptic symbology.

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable
$CCTEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Trioptic Code = Disable
$CCTEN01(CR)

Trioptic Code = Enable

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE)
The following options apply to the Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) symbology.

Code 32 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 bar codes.

$CP3EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 32 = Disable
$CP3EN01(CR)

Code 32 = Enable

140

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 32 (Ital Pharmaceutical Code)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions
The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings:
"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 137
"Code 39 Length Control" on page 137
"Trioptic Code" on page 140

Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 bar code data.
$CP3CT00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CP3CT01(CR)

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
This option enables/disables transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.

$CP3SS00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t
Transmit
$CP3SS01(CR)

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Product Reference Guide

141

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical)

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)
The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP symbology.

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP labels.

$CCCEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 CIP = Disable
$CCCEN01(CR)

Code 39 CIP = Enable

CODE 39 DANISH PPT
The following options apply to the Code 39 Danish PPT symbology.

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables AIM ID for Code 39 Danish PPT Codes.

$CDPEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 Danish PPT = Disable
$CDPEN01(CR)

Code 39 Danish PPT = Enable

142

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 39 LaPoste

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39 LAPOSTE
The following options apply to the Code 39 LaPoste symbology.

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 La Poste labels.

$CLPEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 LaPoste = Disable
$CLPEN01(CR)

Code 39 LaPoste = Enable

CODE 39 PZN
The following options apply to the Code 39 PZN symbology.

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 PZN labels.

$PZEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 39 PZN = Disable
$PZEN01(CR)

Code 39 PZN = Enable

Product Reference Guide

143

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128

CODE 128
The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.

Code 128 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 128 bar codes.

$CC8EN00(CR)

Code 128 = Disable
$CC8EN01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 = Enable

Expand Code 128 to Code 39
This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels.

$CC8C300(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 to Code 39 = Don’t Expand
$CC8C301(CR)

Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand

144

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 bar code data.

$CC8CT00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CC8CT01(CR)

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.

$CC8TF00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CC8TF01(CR)

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send

Product Reference Guide

145

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission
Enables/disables the transmission of “Sub-Code Exchange” characters (NOT transmitted by
standard decoding).
$CC8SC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Disable
$CC8SC01(CR)

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Enable

Code 128 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas
at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the
label.

$CC8LO02(CR)

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
$CC8LO03(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

146

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 128
symbology. See page 267 for more information.

$CC8LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length
$CC8LC01(CR)

Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

147

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128

Code 128 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80
characters.
Table 5 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 5. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
01 Character

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

80 Characters

‘8’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC8L1

Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

148

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 128

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 6 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 6. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

80 Characters

‘8’ and 0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
.

$CC8L2

Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters

149

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1-128

GS1-128
The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GS1-128,
GTIN-128, UCC-128, EAN-128.)

GS1-128 Enable
This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the GS1-128
data format. Options are:
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.
• Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.

$CU8EN00CR)

GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format
$CU8EN01CR)

DEFAULT
GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format
$CU8EN02CR)

GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

GS1-128 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label of this symbology is decoded.

$CU82D00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1-128 2D Component = Disable
$CU82D01(CR)

GS1-128 2D Component = Enable

150

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code ISBT 128

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE ISBT 128
The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.

ISBT 128 Concatenation
Use this option to enable/disable ISBT128 concatenation of 2 labels.

$CI8CE00(CR)

DEFAULT
ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable
$CI8CE01(CR)

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation
When enabled, this feature forces concatenation for ISBT.
This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled.

$CI8FC00(CR)

DEFAULT
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable
$CI8FC01(CR)

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable

Product Reference Guide

151

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code ISBT 128

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.
This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled (see "ISBT 128 Concatenation" on page 151).

$CI8CM00CR)

DEFAULT
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Static
$CI8CM01CR)

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

152

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code ISBT 128

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.

$CI8DT05(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CI8DT0A(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

DEFAULT

$CI8DT14(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec

$CI8DT32(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CI8DT4B(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

$CI8DT64(CR)
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options
To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration
application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on page 10.

Product Reference Guide

153

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)
The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CI2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 = Disable
$CI2EN01(CR)

I 2 of 5 = Enable

154

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check character.
Combinations of these settings are possible via the Aladdin configuration utility, or contact
Technical Support.

$CI2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CI2CC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard
(Modulo 10)
$CI2CC02(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel
$CI2CC04(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL
$CI2CC08(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrysler
$CI2CC10(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch
$CI2CC20(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post

Product Reference Guide

155

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 bar code data.

$CI2CT00(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CI2CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the I 2 of 5
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CI2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
$CI2LC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

156

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from
2 to 50 characters in increments of two.
Table 7 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 7. I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

2 Characters

6 Characters

14 Characters

50 Characters

2

Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits

02

06

14

50

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

‘0’ and ‘2’

‘0’ and ‘6’

‘1’ and ‘4’

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CI2L1

Select I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

157

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 8 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 8. I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

Ignore This
Length

4 Characters

14 Characters

50 Characters

2

Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits

00

04

14

50

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘4’

‘1’ and ‘4’

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CI2L2

Select I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

158

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR
The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.

$CCHEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable
$CCHEN01(CR)

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable

FOLLETT 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.
$CF2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Follett 2 of 5 = Disable
$CF2EN01(CR)

Follett 2 of 5 = Enable

Product Reference Guide

159

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5

STANDARD 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 bar codes.

$C2SEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 = Disable
$C2SEN01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check
character.

$CS2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CS2CC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

160

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Standard 2 of 5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

$CS2CT00(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t
Send
$CS2CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Standard 2
of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CS2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
$CS2LC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

161

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1
is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set
from 1 to 50 characters.
Table 9 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 if you want detailed
instructions on setting this feature.
Table 9. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

01 Character

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CS2L1

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

162

08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Standard 2 of 5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 10 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)

00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CS2L2

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

163

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Industrial 2 of 5 labels.

$CU2EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable
$CU2EN01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CU2CC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

164

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Industrial 2 of 5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CT00(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable
$CU2CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Industrial
2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CU2LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
$CU2LC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

165

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1
is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0
to 50 characters.
Table 11 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 if you want detailed
instructions on setting this feature.
Table 11. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CU2L1

Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

166

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Industrial 2 of 5

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The
length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 12 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CU2L2

Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

167

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code IATA

CODE IATA
The following options apply to the IATA symbology.

IATA Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.

$CIAEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
IATA = Disable
$CIAEN01(CR)

IATA = Enable

IATA Check Character Transmission
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CIACT00(CR)

IATA Check Character Transmission = Disable
$CIACT01(CR)

DEFAULT
IATA Check Character Transmission = Enable

168

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODABAR
The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.

Codabar Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar bar codes.

$CCBEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar = Disable
$CCBEN01(CR)

Codabar = Enable

Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CCBCC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate
$CCBCC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard check char.
$CCBCC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo
10 check char.

Product Reference Guide

169

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar

Codabar Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar bar code data.

$CCBCT00(CR)

Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CCBCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.

$CCBSS00(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t
Transmit
$CCBSS01(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

170

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.

$CCBSC00(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E
$CCBSC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD
$CCBSC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e
$CCBSC03(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match
When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match.

$CCBSM00(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don’t Require
Match
$CCBSM01(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match

Product Reference Guide

171

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar

Codabar Quiet Zones
Specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends
of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CCBLO02(CR)

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
$CCBLO03(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codabar
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCBLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Codabar Length Control = Variable Length
$CCBLC01(CR)

Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

172

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Codabar

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Codabar Length ControlCodabar Length
Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data
characters. The length must include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to
50 characters.
Table 13 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 13. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting (and pad
with leading zeroes)

03 Characters

09 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘3’

‘0’ and ‘9’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CCBL1

Select Codabar Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

173

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar

Codabar Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Codabar Length ControlCodabar Length
Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data
characters. The length must include at least one data character.
The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 14 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 14. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting (and pad
with leading zeroes)

00 Ignore This
Length

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CCBL2

Select Codabar Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

174

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ABC Codabar

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC CODABAR
The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.

$CCBAB00(CR)

DEFAULT
ABC Codabar = Disable
$CCBAB01(CR)

ABC Codabar = Enable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

$CCBCM00(CR)

DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static
$CCBCM01(CR)

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

Product Reference Guide

175

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar Dynamic
Concatenation Mode.

$CCBDT05(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50
msec
$CCBDT0A(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100
msec
$CCBDT14(CR)

DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200
msec
$CCBDT32(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500
msec
$CCBDT4B(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750
msec
$CCBDT64(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second

176

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ABC Codabar

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
Forces labels starting or ending with D to be concatenated.

$CCBFC00(CR)

DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable
$CCBFC01(CR)

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable

Product Reference Guide

177

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11

CODE 11
The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.

Code 11 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 bar codes.
$CC1EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 11 = Disable
$CC1EN01(CR)

Code 11 = Enable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CC00(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CC1CC01(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C
$CC1CC02(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K
$CC1CC03(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K

178

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 11

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CT00(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
$CC1CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 11 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 11
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC1LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length
$CC1LC01(CR)

Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

179

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11

Code 11 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to
50 characters.
Table 15 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 15. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)

02 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘2’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC1L1

Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

180

04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 11

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 16 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 16. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)

00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ and 0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC1.2

Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

181

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14)
symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes.

$C4BEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable
$C4BEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128
label data format.

$C4BU800(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation =
Disable
$C4BU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation =
Enable

182

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label for this symbology is decoded.

$C4B2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$C4B2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded)
symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes.

$CXBEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable
$CXBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Enable

Product Reference Guide

183

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label
data format.

$CXBU800(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
$CXBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label of this symbology is decoded.

$CXB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Disable
$CXB2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Enable

184

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the GS1
DataBar™ Expanded symbology.
Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CXBLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable
Length
$CXBLC01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

185

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length
Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length
can be set from 1 to 74 characters.
Table 17 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 17. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
01 Character

07 Characters

52 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘5’ and ‘2’

74 Characters

‘7’ AND ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CXBL1

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

186

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length
Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed
length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length
can be set from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed
length).
Table 18 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 18. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (ignore second length)

07 Characters

52 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘5’ and ‘2’

74 Characters

‘7’ and ‘4’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CXBL2

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters

187

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Limited (formerly RSS Limited)
symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes.

$CLBEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable
$CLBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data
format.
$CLBU800(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
$CLBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

188

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component
This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base
label of this symbology is decoded.

$CLB2D00(CR)

DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component =
Disable (2D component not required)
$CLB2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component =
2D component must be decoded

CODE 93
The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology.

Code 93 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.

$CC9EN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 93 = Disable
$CC9EN01(CR)

Code 93 = Enable

Product Reference Guide

189

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93

Code 93 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CC00(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CC9CC01(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C
$CC9CC02(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K
$CC9CC03(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C
and K

Code 93 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CT00(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable
$CC9CT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable

190

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 93
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC9LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length
$CC9LC01(CR)

Code 93 = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

191

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93

Code 93 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50
characters.
Table 19 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 19. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
01 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC9L1

Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

192

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Code 93

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of
0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 20 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 20. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

‘0’ and ‘0’

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC9L2

Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

193

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI

Code 93 Quiet Zones
Enables/disables quiet zones for Code 93.

$CC9LO02(CR)

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
$CC9LO03(CR)

DEFAULT
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

MSI
The following options apply to the MSI symbology.

MSI Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.
$CMSEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
MSI = Disable
$CMSEN01(CR)

MSI = Enable

194

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MSI

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.
$CMSCC00(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CMSCC01(CR)

DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10
$CMSCC02(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10
$CMSCC03(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10

MSI Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.
$CMSCT00(CR)

MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable
$CMSCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

Product Reference Guide

195

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI

MSI Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
MSI symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be

set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMSLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
MSI Length Control = Variable Length
$CMSLC01(CR)

MSI = Fixed Length

196

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MSI

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set
from 01 to 50 characters.
Table 21 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 21. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
01 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

‘0’ and ‘1’

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CMSL1

Select MSI Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

197

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI

MSI Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters.
The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length
(only one fixed length).
Table 22 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 22. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CMSL2

Select MSI Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

198

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Plessey

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PLESSEY
The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.

Plessey Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.
$CPLEN00CR)

DEFAULT
Plessey = Disable
$CPLEN01CR)

Plessey = Enable

Plessey Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Plessey check character.
$CPLCC00(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable
$CPLCC01(CR)

DEFAULT
Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Plessey std. check char. verification
$CPLCC02(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Anker check char. verification
$CPLCC03(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification

Product Reference Guide

199

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey

Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CPLCT00(CR)

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable
$CPLCT01(CR)

DEFAULT
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable

Plessey Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Plessey
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CPLLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Plessey Length Control = Variable Length
$CPLLC01(CR)

Plessey = Fixed Length

200

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Plessey

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50
characters.
Table 23 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 23. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
01 Characters

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CPLL1

Select Plessey Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

201

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey

Plessey Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 24 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 267 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 24. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)

07 Characters

15 Characters

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING

4

Scan Two Characters From

‘0’ and ‘0’

Appendix D, Keypad

5

‘0’ and ‘7’

‘1’ and ‘5’

50 Characters

‘5’ AND ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CPLL2

Select Plessey Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

202

50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

2D SYMBOLOGIES
2D Global Features
•
•

2D Maximum Decoding Time, page
204
2D Structured Append, page 205

•

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control,
page 205

The reader supports the following 2D symbologies (bar code types). Symbology-dependent
options for each symbology are included in this chapter. See "1D Code Selection" starting on
page 111 for configuration of 1D bar codes.
2D Symbologies
•
•
•
•
•

Aztec Code, page 206
China Sensible Code, page 209
Data Matrix, page 212
Maxicode, page 215
PDF417, page 218

•
•
•
•
•

Micro PDF417, page 221
QR Code, page 224
Micro QR Code, page 227
UCC Composite, page 230
Postal Code Selection, page 232

2D Global Features
The following features are common to all, or in some cases, most of the available 2D
symbologies. Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also
reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard
factory settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or
implemented for your system.
To set most features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.
2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may
need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that
the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the
appropriate characters from the keypad.
Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar
code to exit Programming Mode.

Product Reference Guide

203

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

2D Global Features

2D Maximum Decoding Time
This feature specifies the maximum amount of time the software will spend attempting to
decode a 2D label. The selectable range is 10 milliseconds to 2.55 milliseconds.

$CDETM0A(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 100 msec
$CDETM32(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 200 msec
$CDETM23(CR)

DEFAULT
2D Maximum Decoding Time = 350 msec
$CDETM80(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 500 msec
$CDETM16(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 1 Second
$CDETMC8(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2 Seconds
$CDETMFF(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2.55 Seconds

204

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

2D Global Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

2D Structured Append
Enables/disables ability of reader to append multiple 2D Codes labels in a structured format.
The structured append property is globally applied to the following symbologies, if these are
enabled:
•
•

Data Matrix
QR Code

•
•

Aztec
PDF 417

$CDESA00(CR)

DEFAULT
Structured Append = Disable

$CDESA01(CR)

Structured Append = Enable

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control
Specifies the options available for decoding normal/negative printed 2D symbols. This
configuration item applies globally to all the 2D symbologies that support that feature
according to Standard AIM Specification: Data Matrix, QR, MicroQR, Aztec and Chinese
Sensible Code.
To decode all symbologies, including linear symbologies, refer to "Decode Negative Image" on
page 106D Symbology Selection

$CIPNR00(CR)

DEFAULT
Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Normal
$CIPNR01(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Inverse
$CIPNR02(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control =
Both Normal and Inverse

Product Reference Guide

205

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code

Aztec Code
Aztec Code Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Aztec Code labels.

$CAZEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Aztec Code = Disable
$CAZEN01(CR)

Aztec Code = Enable

Aztec Code Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CAZLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Aztec Code Length Control = Variable Length
$CAZLC01(CR)

Aztec Code Length Control = Fixed Length

206

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Aztec Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Aztec Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CAZL1

Select Aztec Code Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

207

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code

Aztec Code Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Aztec Code Length Control. Length 2 is
the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad
with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CAZL2

Select Aztec Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

208

Length 2 is 3,832 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

China Sensible Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code
China Sensible Code Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode China Sensible Code labels.
$CCSEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
China Sensible Code = Disable
$CCSEN01(CR)

China Sensible Code = Enable

China Sensible Code Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCSLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
China Sensible Code Length Control = Variable Length
$CCSLC01(CR)

China Sensible Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

209

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code

China Sensible Code Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for China Sensible Code Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with
zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CCSL1

Select China Sensible Code Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

210

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

China Sensible Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for China Sensible Code Length Control.
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if
in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of
0001 (pad with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CCSL2

Select China Sensible Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

Length 2 is 7,827 Characters

211

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix

Data Matrix
Data Matrix Enable / Disable
Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Data Matrix labels.
$CDMEN00(CR)

Data Matrix = Disable
$CDMEN01(CR)

DEFAULT
Data Matrix = Enable

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style
Specifies the options available when reading Data Matrix with different form factors. Choices
are:
• Square Style
• Rectangular Style
• Both Square and Rectangular Style
The configuration item can also be configured as a bit mask to filter one or more Data Matrix
labels with different symbol size AND shape styles.
$CDMDM3FFF0BDF)

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Square Style
$CDMDM0000420

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Rectangular Style
$CDMD03FFFFFF

DEFAULT

212

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask =
Both Square and Rectangular Style

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Matrix

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CDMLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Data Matrix Length Control = Variable Length
$CDMLC01(CR)

Data Matrix Length Control = Fixed Length

Data Matrix Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Data Matrix Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CDML1

Select Data Matrix Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

213

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix

Data Matrix Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Data Matrix Length Control. Length 2 is
the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad
with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CDML2

Select Data Matrix Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

214

Length 2 is 3,116 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Maxicode

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode
Maxicode Enable / Disable
Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Maxicode labels.
$CMXEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Maxicode = Disable
$CMXEN01(CR)

Maxicode = Enable

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission
Enables/disables the transmission of only the Primary Message when the Secondary
Message is not readable.

$CMXPT00(CR)

DEFAULT
Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Disable
$CMXPT01(CR)

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Enable

Product Reference Guide

215

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode

Maxicode Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMXLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Maxicode Length Control = Variable Length
$CMXLC01(CR)

Maxicode Length Control = Fixed Length

Maxicode Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Maxicode Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMXL1

Select Maxicode Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

216

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Maxicode

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Maxicode Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with
zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMXL2

Select Maxicode Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

Length 2 is 0145 Characters

217

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417

PDF417
PDF417 Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode PDF417 labels.
$CP4EN00(CR)

PDF417 = Disable
$CP4EN01(CR)

DEFAULT
PDF417 = Enable

PDF417 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CP4LC00(CR)

DEFAULT
PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length
$CP4LC01(CR)

PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

218

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

PDF417

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for PDF417 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 2,710
characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be
considered to be 2,710.
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CP4L1

Select PDF417 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

219

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417

PDF417 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for PDF417 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters. Characters can be set from 01 to 2,710 characters (pad
with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710.
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CP4L2

Select PDF417 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

220

Length 2 is 2,710 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro PDF417

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417
Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro PDF417 labels.

$CMIEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Micro PDF417 = Disable
$CMIEN01(CR)

Micro PDF417 = Enable

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation
Specifies which AIM ID to use for MicroPDF labels when doing Code 128 or GS1-128
emulation.
Emulation choices are:
• Micro PDF AIM ID and label type
• Code 128 / EAN128 AIM Id and label type

$CMIU800(CR)

DEFAULT
Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =
Micro PDF AIM ID and label type
$CMIU801(CR)

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation =
Code 128 / EAN128 AIM ID and label type

Product Reference Guide

221

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417

Micro PDF417 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMILC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Micro PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length
$CMILC01(CR)

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro PDF417 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to
0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be
considered to be 0366.
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMIL1

Select Micro PDF417 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

222

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro PDF417

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro PDF417 Length Control. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0366
characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be considered
to be 0366.
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMIL2

Select Micro PDF417 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

Length 2 is 0366 Characters

223

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code

QR Code
QR Code Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode QR Code labels.
$CQREN00(CR)

QR Code = Disable
$CQREN01(CR)

DEFAULT
QR Code = Enable

QR Code Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
$CQRLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
QR Code Length Control = Variable Length
$CQRLC01(CR)

QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

224

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

QR Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for QR Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CQRL1

Select QR Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

225

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code

QR Code Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for QR Code Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with
zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CQRL2

Select QR Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

226

Length 2 is 7,089 Characters

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro QR Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code
Micro QR Code Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro QR Code labels.
MQEN00

DEFAULT
Micro QR Code = Disable
MQEN01

Micro QR Code = Enable

Micro QR Code Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this
symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
$CMQLC00(CR)

DEFAULT
Micro QR Code Length Control = Variable Length
$CMQLC01(CR)

Micro QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide

227

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code

Micro QR Code Set Length 1
Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with
zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMQL1

Select Micro QR Code Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

228

0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Micro QR Code

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad
with zeroes).
See page 267 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMQL2

Select QR Code Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

Length 2 is 0035 Characters

229

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UCC Composite

UCC Composite
UCC Composite Enable / Disable
Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode the stacked part of a UCC Composite label.

This feature is not effective when Global AIM IDs are enabled (see "Global

AIM ID" on page 77).

$CCMEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
UCC Composite = Disable
$CCMEN01(CR)

UCC Composite = Enable

230

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

UCC Composite

UCC Optional Composite Timer
Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for the stacked part of a UCC Composite label
before transmitting the linear label without an add-on.
$CCMOT00(CR)

DEFAULT
UCC Optional Composite Timer = Timer Disabled
$CCMOT01(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 100msec
$CCMOT02(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 200msec
$CCMOT03(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 300msec
$CCMOT04(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 400msec
$CCMOT05(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 500msec

Product Reference Guide

231

Postal Code Selection
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode labels of a specific postal symbology.
•
•
•
•
•

Disable All Postal Codes
Postnet
Planet
Royal Mail
Kix

•
•
•
•
•

Australia Post
Japan Post
IMB
Sweden Post
Portugal Post

$CPOEN00(CR)

DEFAULT
Postal Code Selection = Disable All Postal Codes
$CPOEN01(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Postnet
$CPOEN02(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Planet
$CPOEN03(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Royal Mail
$CPOEN04(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Kix
$CPOEN05(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Australia Post

232

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Postal Code Selection

Postal Code Selection — cont.
$CPOEN06(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Japan Post
$CPOEN07(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable IMB
$CPOEN08(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Sweden Post
$CPOEN09(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Portugal Post

Postnet BB Control
Controls the ability of the scanner to decode B and B' fields of Postnet labels.

$CPOBB00(CR)

DEFAULT
Postnet BB Control = Disable
$CPOBB01(CR)

Postnet BB Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide

233

NOTES

234

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

WIRELESS FEATURES
This section provides options and programming related to the reader’s wireless communication
features. Reference Appendix B. for a listing of standard factory settings.

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 236
•Good Transmission
•Beep Frequency
•Beep Duration
•Beep Volume
•Disconnect Beep
•Docking Beep
•Leash Alarm

Beep

CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 241
•Automatic Configuration Update
•Copy Configuration to Scanner
•Copy Configuration to Base Station

BATCH FEATURES starting on page 242
•Batch Mode
•Send Batch
•Erase Batch Memory
•RF Batch Mode Transmit

Delay

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK starting on page 244
BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES starting on page 245
•Source Radio Address Transmission
•Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
•Link Timeout
•BT Security Mode
•BT PIN Code
•Select PIN Code Length
•Set PIN Code
•BT Poll Rate
•Power Off
•Powerdown Timeout

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 251
•STAR
•STAR

Product Reference Guide

Radio Protocol Timeout
Radio Transmit Mode

235

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wireless Beeper Features

Wireless Beeper Features
Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.

Good Transmission Beep
Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs when a
Label is correctly transmitted to the base.

$CBTAB00(CR)

Good Transmission Beep = Disable
$CBTAB01(CR)

DEFAULT
Good Transmission Beep = Enable

Beep Frequency
Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency, selectable
from the list below (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).

$CBTBF00(CR)

DEFAULT
Beep Frequency = Low
$CBTBF01(CR)

Beep Frequency = Medium
$CBTBF02(CR)

Beep Frequency = High

236

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wireless Beeper Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Beep Duration
This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications.
$CBTBD06(CR)

Beep Duration = 60 msec
$CBTBD08(CR)

DEFAULT

Beep Duration = 80 msec

$CBTBD0A(CR)

Beep Duration = 100 msec
$CBTBD0C(CR)

Beep Duration = 120 msec
$CBTBD0E(CR)

Beep Duration = 140 msec
$CBTBD10(CR)

Beep Duration = 160 msec
$CBTBD12(CR)

Beep Duration = 180 msec
$CBTBD14(CR)

Beep Duration = 200 msec

Product Reference Guide

237

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wireless Beeper Features

Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three
selectable volume levels.

$CBTBV00(CR)

Beep Volume = Low
$CBTBV01(CR)

Beep Volume = Medium
$CBTBV02(CR)

DEFAULT
Beep Volume = High

Disconnect Beep
Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become connected or disconnected
from a Base Station.
The defaults are different for the STAR and BT models.

$CBTDB00(CR)

Disconnect Beep = Disable
$CBTDB01(CR)

DEFAULT
Disconnect Beep = Enable

238

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Wireless Beeper Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Docking Beep
Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.

$CBTCB00(CR)

Docking Beep = Disable
$CBTCB01(CR)

DEFAULT
Docking Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm
This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per second)
when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances where the reader
might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart.
For this mode to be effective, the reader must be linked to the Base Station. If the reader is
asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there is no way for it to know where it is relative
to the Base Station because communication is not active between the devices.

$CBTLB00(CR)

DEFAULT
Leash Alarm = Disabled
$CBTLB01(CR)

Leash Alarm = 1 Second
$CBTLB02(CR)

Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds

Product Reference Guide

239

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wireless Beeper Features

Leash Alarm — cont.
$CBTLB03(CR)

Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds
$CBTLB04(CR)

Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds
$CBTLB05(CR)

Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds
$CBTLB0A(CR)

Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds
$CBTLB19(CR)

Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds
$CBTLB1E(CR)

Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds

240

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Configuration Updates

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Configuration Updates
See page 286 in “References” for detailed information and examples of these features.

Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically ensure they
stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/or configuration. See page 286 for more information on this feature.
$CBTCU00(CR)

Automatic Configuration Update = Disable
$CBTCU01(CR)

DEFAULT
Automatic Configuration Update = Enable

Copy Configuration to Scanner
Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the scanner. Use this
method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the scanner.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this bar code.
py g

Copy Configuration to Scanner

Copy Configuration to Base Station
Scan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the Base Station. Use this
method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time
configurationCpycfg2Ba
update to be performed on the Base Station.

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this bar code.

Product Reference Guide

241

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Batch Features

Batch Features
Batch Mode
This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from the base.
Options are as follows:
• Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.
•
•

Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of
range and is disconnected from the remote device.
Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send" label.
$CBTBM00(CR)

DEFAULT
Batch Mode = Disabled
$CBTBM01(CR)

Batch Mode = Automatic
$CBTBM02(CR)

Batch Mode = Manual

Send Batch
When the scanner is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to initiate
sending of labels stored in batch memory.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this bar code.
BatchSend

Send Batch

242

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Batch Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Erase Batch Memory
When the scanner is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to erase any
labels stored in batch memory.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this bar code.

Erase Batch Memory

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory.
$CBTTD00(CR)

DEFAULT
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = No Delay

$CBTTD05(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 50 mS
$CBTTD0A(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 100 mS
$CBTTD32(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds
$CBTTD64(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 1 second

Product Reference Guide

243

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Direct Radio Autolink

$CBTTDFA(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds

Direct Radio Autolink
This feature enables/disables the ability to link a wireless handheld to a base station without
scanning the Unlink label first.
$CBTDL00(CR)

DEFAULT
Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required
$CBTDL01(CR)

Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking

244

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RF Address Stamping

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES
The features in this section are valid only for Gryphon Bluetooth models. Also reference the
Setup section for instructions on Linking a BT Reader to a PC, starting on page 26.

RF Address Stamping
These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion.

Source Radio Address Transmission
Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the host
and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 286 in “References” for
detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label
formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex):
30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44
$CBTAS00(CR)

DEFAULT
Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include
$CBTAS01(CR)

Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix

Product Reference Guide

245

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RF Address Stamping

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio
address when address stamping is enabled.
This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on
page 245 is enabled.

$CBTAD

Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then
start again at the beginning.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D. Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.
~

CANCEL

00 = No Delimiter Character

DEFAULT
Link Timeout

This feature specifies the wait time in one-second ticks for response from the remote. The
selectable timeout range is 01 to 40 (01-0x28) seconds in one second increments.
See page 260 for more information on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT
PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the
bar code at left followed by the digits from the
Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D. Keypad
representing your desired character(s). End by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CBTLT

Set Link Timeout

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then
start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT
246

02 Link Timeout value is 2 seconds

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

BT Security Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BT Security Features
On the BT system, it is possible to set a (configurable) PIN code to authenticate/connect BT
devices, and encrypt the data.
The BT PIN code can be enabled and configured by reading the bar codes in the following
sections.
If you are using a BT scanner directly connected to a host through a BT dongle,
verify that the scanner and the BT driver used by the dongle share the same PIN
code and the same security level. Otherwise the connection cannot be established.

Follow these steps to set the PIN code for a scanner:
1. Enable BT Security Mode by scanning the “Enable” bar code below.
2. Select a PIN code length of either 4 or 16 characters by scanning the appropriate bar code
in "Select PIN Code Length" on page 248.
3. Scan the relevant bar code from "Set PIN Code" on page 248, then scan the desired alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D. Keypad to set the PIN code.
See page 288 in “References” for more detailed information and examples for this feature.

BT Security Mode
This feature enables/disables authentication and encryption of the BT link. Use the feature "BT
PIN Code" on page 248 to specify the length and digits in the PIN code used to authenticate
the BT Link.
Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default “Enabled” setting, the devices must only be
relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to “Disabled,” the Security
Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base
Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

$CBTSE00(CR)

DEFAULT
BT Security Mode = Disable
$CBTSE01(CR)

BT Security Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide

247

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BT Security Features

BT PIN Code
After enabling Security Mode (see "BT Security Mode" on page 247), specify whether you want
to set a 4-digit or a 16-digit PIN Code. See page 288 for detailed information and examples for
setting this feature.

Select PIN Code Length
$CBTPS00\r

DEFAULT
Select 4-character BT PIN Code
~$CBTPS01\r

Select 16-character BT PIN Code

Set PIN Code
Determine the desired characters for the PIN code, then convert to hexadecimal using the
ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual. See page 288 for detailed information and
examples for setting this feature.
$CBTPC

Set 4-character BT PIN Code

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D. Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.
$CBTP6

Set 16-character BT PIN Code
~

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then
start again at the beginning.
CANCEL

DEFAULT

248

31323334 = Default PIN Code is 1234

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Other BT Features

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Other BT Features
BT Poll Rate
This feature specifies the time between BT polls.

$CBTST00(CR)

BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate
$CBTST01(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 10 ms
$CBTST02(CR)

DEFAULT
BT Poll Rate = 20 ms
$CBTST05(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 50 ms
$CBTST0A(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 100 ms
$CBTST14(CR)

BT Poll Rate = 200 ms

Product Reference Guide

249

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Other BT Features

Power Off
See “Power Off” on page 26 for information about this BT feature.

Powerdown Timeout
The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off when
the imager has been idle.

$CSLPS00(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = Disable
$CSLPS01(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes
$CSLPS02(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes
R)$CSLPS03(CR
)

DEFAULT
DEFAULT
Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes

$CSLPS06(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)
$CSLPS0C(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)

250

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Other BT Features

FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY
The features in this section are valid only for the Gryphon I GM440X Star model:
• STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
• STAR Radio Transmit Mode

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and
Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the
same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See page 287 in
“References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

Set Radio Protocol Timeout

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

Product Reference Guide

02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout

251

STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications.
Options are:
• ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station
receives a label
• ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station
has sent the label to the host
• ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent
the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.

DEFAULT
ACK from cradle

ACK when sent to host

ACK from host

ACK from host works only for RS-232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/
NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface
conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.
See "Message Formatting" on page 291 for details.

The Base Station can receive a host message only if Host Commands
Obey/Ignore (page 39) is set to Ignore.

252

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

MOTION FEATURES

MOTION AIMING CONTROL on page 253
MOTION SENSITIVITY on page 254
MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT on page 254
Use this chapter to configure motion settings for the handheld.
Reference Appendix B for a listing of standard factory settings.

Motion Aiming Control
Configures the ability of the scanner to Enable/Disable the Aiming system when motion is
detected.

$CMOMD00(CR)

Motion Aiming Control = Disable
$CMOMD01(CR)

DEFAULT
Motion Aiming Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide

253

Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Motion Features

Motion Sensitivity
Defines discrete set of levels for scanner motion sensitivity when in handheld use.
$CMOSY00(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = Low
$CMOSY01(CR)

DEFAULT
Motion Sensitivity = Medium
$CMOSY02(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = High

Motionless Timeout
Specifies the waiting time in 100 millisecond ticks to assume that the reader is in a motionless
condition. The selectable range is 500 msec to 25.5 Seconds. When no motion event is detected
for a period of time longer than this timeout, the software assumes the reader is in a motionless
condition. This normally results in returning the scanner to Stand Mode. This option relates to
such features as Aimer On and Stand Mode Object Sense scanning with respect to motion. See
"Motionless Timeout" on page 289 in References.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code
at left followed by three digits from the Alphanumeric
characters in Appendix D Keypad representing your
desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT
bar code again.

$CMOTO

Select Motionless Timeout Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at
the beginning.

~

CANCEL

DEFAULT

254

020 = Motionless Timeout = 2 seconds

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 4
References
This section contains explanations and examples of selected bar code features. See
"Configuration Using Bar Codes" starting on page 37 for the actual bar code labels used to
configure the reader.

RS-232 PARAMETERS starting on page 256
•RS-232
•RS-232/USB

COM Parameters

KEYBOARD INTERFACE starting on page 264
•Wedge Quiet Interval
•Intercharacter Delay
•Intercode Delay

SYMBOLOGIES starting on page 267
Set Length
DATA EDITING starting on page 268
•Global Prefix/Suffix
•Global AIM ID
•Label ID
•Character Conversion

READING PARAMETERS starting on page 277
•Good

Read LED Duration

SCANNING FEATURES starting on page 278
•Scan Mode
•Stand Mode Off Time
•Scanning Active Time
•Aiming Duration Time
•Flash On Time
•Flash Off Time
•Multiple Labels Ordering by

Code Symbology

RF FEATURES starting on page 286
•Automatic Configuration
•RF Address Stamping
•BT-Only Features

Update

MOTION FEATURES starting on page 289
•Motionless

Product Reference Guide

Timeout

255

References

RS-232 Parameters
RS-232
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud rate to
match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate setting, data may
not reach the host correctly.

Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one
character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The
number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is
programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.

Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is the
most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host
device requirements.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an
odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an
even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.

Handshaking Control
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the
hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Handshaking
Control includes the following options:
• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.
• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.
• RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and
XOFF gate transmissions.
• RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.
RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions and
controls enable and disable state of scanner.

256

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

RS-232/USB COM Parameters
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
To set the delay:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming
Mode.
4. Go to page 47 and scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.
This completes the procedure. See Table 25 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 25. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

50ms

150ms

600ms

850ms

2

Divide by 10 (pad with leading
zeroes to yield two-digits)

05

15

60

85

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘5’ and ‘0’

‘6’ and ‘0’

‘8’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

257

References

ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.
When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and
sends “NAK” when the data is in error.
Options are:
• Disable
• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host
when a label is sent.
• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK
when the host sends a command.
• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not
recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 50 and scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.
See Table 26 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 26. ACK Character Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Character/Value

ACK

$

@

>

2

Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart

0x06

0x24

0x40

0x3E

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING

5
6

258

Scan Two Characters from
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘6’

‘2’ and ‘4’

‘4’ and ‘0’

‘3’ AND ‘E’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature:
1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 50 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 27 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 27. NAK Character Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Character/Value

NAK

$

@

>

2

Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart

0x15

0x24

0x40

0x3E

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘1’ and ‘5’

‘2’ and ‘4’

‘4’ and ‘0’

‘3’ AND ‘E’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

259

References

ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host
following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15
seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
To set this value:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 28. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

200ms

1,000ms (1 sec.)

5200ms (5.2 sec.)

15,000ms (15 sec.)

2

Divide by 200

01

05

26

75

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING

5
6

260

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘2’ and ‘6’

‘7’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry
condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and
a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.
To set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005,
20 = 020, etc.
3. Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication
after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 29 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 29. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

Disable Retry
Count

3 Retries

54 Retries

Unlimited Retries

2

Pad with leading zero(es)

000

003

054

255

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING

5

Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’

‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

261

References

Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.

To set the value:
1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable Character is not used (not available).
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 30 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 30. Disable Character Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired character/value

‘d’

‘}’

‘D’

Disable Command
Not Used

2

Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart

0x64

0x7D

0x44

0xFF

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

5
6

262

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘6’ and ‘4’

‘7’ and ‘D’

‘4’ and ‘4’

‘F’ AND ‘F’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RS-232 Parameters

Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature:
Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable Character is
not used (not available).
1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 31 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 31. Enable Character Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired character/value

‘e’

‘}’

‘E’

Enable Command
Not Used

2

Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart

0x65

0x7D

0x45

0xFF

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘6’ and ‘5’

‘7’ and ‘D’

‘4’ and ‘5’

‘F’ AND ‘F’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

263

References

Keyboard Interface
Wedge Quiet Interval
Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard
connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 61 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Prog. Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.
This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See Table 32 for some examples
of how to set this feature.
Table 32. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

10ms

150ms

600ms

850ms

2

Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes)

01

15

60

85

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING

5
6

264

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘1’ and ‘5’

‘6’ and ‘0’

‘8’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Keyboard Interface

Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

To set the delay:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 47 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 33 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 33. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

50ms

150ms

600ms

850ms

2

Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield twodigits)

05

15

60

85

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘1’ and ‘5’

‘6’ and ‘0’

‘8’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

265

References

Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range
for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 =
20, etc
3. Go to page 61 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 34 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 34. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

No Delay

5 Seconds

60 Seconds

99 Seconds

2

Pad with leading zero(es)

00

05

60

99

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING

5
6

266

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘6’ and ‘0’

‘9’ AND ‘9’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Symbologies

Symbologies
Set Length
Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for
the specified symbology.
Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Length includes the bar code’s data characters only.
The number of characters that can be set varies, depending on the symbology. Reference the
page for your selected symbology to see specific variables.
1. Determine the desired character length (varies depending on symbology). Pad the number
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 1 SETTING for your selected symbology.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Prog Mode.

Set Length 2
This feature allows you to set one of the bar code lengths for the specified symbology. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. See the page for the specific symbology for parameters.
The length that can be set varies depending on the symbology. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore
this length (only one fixed length).
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired character length (from 1 to 50 — or 0 to ignore this length). Pad
the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20,
etc.
2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 2 SETTING for your selected symbology.

Product Reference Guide

267

References
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad that represent
the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure.

Data Editing
It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.

CAUTION
When a bar code is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer along
with the bar code data. This combination of bar code data and supplementary user-defined data
is called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to build specific user-defined
data into a message string.
There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after scanned
data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific
symbologies. Figure 15 shows the available elements you can add to a message string:
Figure 15. Breakdown of a Message String
Label ID Transmission:
Enable this option to
transmit the Label ID you
configure for the scanned
symbology.

Prefix

Label ID

AIM ID

OR...
Bar Code Data

Label ID

Suffix

AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the
common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled,
this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar
code data.
00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical
Support (as described on page 10) for more information.

268

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing
Please Keep In Mind...
•

•

•
•

Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.
A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference "1D Code
Selection" starting on page 111) or across all symbologies (set via the Global features in
this chapter).
You can add any character from the ASCII Chart (from 00-FF) on the inside back cover of
this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.
Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.

Global Prefix/Suffix
Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data) and/
or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data) as indicated in Figure 16.
Figure 16. Prefix and Suffix Positions

OR...
Prefix

Label ID

AIM ID

Bar Code Data

Label ID

Suffix

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

AND
OR

Example: Setting a Prefix
In this example, we’ll set a prefix for all symbologies.
1. Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned bar code data. In this
example, we’ll add a dollar sign (‘$’) as a prefix.
2. Go to page 76 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code, then
scan the SET GLOBAL PREFIX bar code.
3. Reference the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value
assigned to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the ‘$’ character is
24. To enter this selection code, scan the ‘2’ and ‘4’ bar codes from Appendix D, Keypad.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

4. If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar
code to terminate the string.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.
6. The resulting message string would appear as follows:
Scanned bar code data: 12345
Resulting message string output: $12345

Product Reference Guide

269

References

Global AIM ID
This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of three
characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).
SYMBOLOGY

CHAR

SYMBOLOGY

CHAR

UPC/EAN

Ea

Code 128/GS1-128

C

Code 39 and 
Code 32

A

DataBar Omnidirectional,
DataBar Expanded

e

Codabar

F

Standard 2 of 5

S

Interleaved 2 of 5

I

ISBN

Xb

Code 93

G

Code 11

H

a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 17. AIM ID

Prefix

270

Label ID

AIM ID

Bar Code Data

Label ID

Suffix

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing

Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x010xFF), used to identify a bar code (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or
following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This
feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID:
Pre-loaded Sets" below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per
Symbology" on page 274). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry
standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID" on page 77.

Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. Table 35 shows the USA and the EU sets.

CAUTION

When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to
the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults
will be lost.

Table 35. Label ID Pre-loaded Sets
USA Label ID set
Symbology

EU Label ID set

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

ABC CODABAR

S

530000

S

530000

ANKER PLESSEY

o

6F0000

o

6F0000

AZTEC

Az

417A00

!

210000

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

$S

245300

$S

245300

CODABAR

%

250000

R

520000

CODE11

CE

434500

b

620000

CODE128

#

230000

T

540000

CODE32

A

410000

X

580000

CODE39

*

2A0000

V

560000

CODE39 CIP

Y

590000

Y

590000

CODE39 DANISH PPT

$Y

245900

$Y

245900

CODE39 LAPOSTE

$a

246100

$a

246100

CODE39 PZN

$Z

245A00

$Z

245A00

CODE93

&

260000

U

550000

DATABAR 14

R4

523400

u

750000

Product Reference Guide

271

References
USA Label ID set
Symbology

EU Label ID set

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE

R4

523400

c

523400

DATABAR EXPANDED

RX

525800

t

740000

DATABAR EXPANDED COMPOSITE

RX

525800

d

525800

DATABAR LIMITED

RL

524C00

v

760000

DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE

RL

524C00

i

524C00

DATA MATRIX

Dm

446D00

w

770000

EAN128

000000

k

6B0000

EAN128 COMPOSITE

000000

$E

244500

EAN13

F

460000

B

420000

EAN13 P2

F

460000

L

4C0000

EAN13 P5

F

460000

M

4D0000

EAN13 COMPOSITE

F

460000

$F

244600

EAN8

FF

464600

A

410000

EAN8 P2

FF

464600

J

4A0000

EAN8 P5

FF

464600

K

4B0000

EAN8 COMPOSITE

FF

464600

$G

244700

FOLLET 2OF5

O

4F0000

O

4F0000

GTIN

G

470000

$A

244100

GTIN2

G2

473200

$B

244200

GTIN5

G5

473500

$C

244300

I2OF5

i

690000

N

4E0000

IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

IA

494100

&

260000

INDUSTRIAL 2OF5

W

570000

W

570000

ISBN

I

490000

@

400000

ISBT128 CONCAT

f

660000

f

660000

ISSN

n

6E0000

n

6E0000

MAXICODE

MC

4D4300

x

780000

MICRO QR

$Q

245100

$Q

245100

MICRO PDF

mP

6D5000

8

380000

272

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing
USA Label ID set
Symbology

EU Label ID set

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

Default
Character

Default
ASCII

MSI

@

400000

Z

5A0000

PDF417

P

500000

r

720000

PLESSEY

a

610000

a

610000

POSTAL AUSTRALIAN

$K

244B00

$K

244B00

POSTAL IMB

$V

245600

$V

245600

POSTAL JAPANESE

$R

245200

$R

245200

POSTAL KIX

$U

245500

$U

245500

POSTAL PLANET

$W

245700

$W

245700

POSTAL PORTUGAL

$P

245000

$P

245000

POSTAL POSTNET BB

$L

244C00

$L

244C00

POSTAL ROYAL MAIL

$M

244D00

$M

244D00

POSTAL SWEDISH

$X

245800

$X

245800

POSTNET

1

310000

1

310000

QR CODE

QR

515200

y

790000

s

730000

P

500000

TRIOPTIC

$T

245400

$T

245400

UPCA

A

410000

C

430000

UPCA P2

A

410000

F

460000

UPCA P5

A

410000

G

470000

UPCA COMPOSITE

A

410000

$H

244800

UPCE

E

450000

D

440000

UPCE P2

E

450000

H

480000

UPCE P5

E

450000

I

490000

UPCE COMPOSITE

E

450000

$J

244A00

S25

Product Reference Guide

273

References

Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:
1. Go to page 81 and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.
2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as suffix) by scanning the appropriate bar code in the section "Label ID Control" on page 81.
Reference Figure 18 for Label ID positioning options if multiple identification features are
enabled.
3. Scan a bar code to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom Label
ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection • 1D Symbologies" on page 82.
4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the
Label ID for the selected symbology.
5. Turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent
hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an
equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as 3D. Turn to
"Keypad" starting on page 319 and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters
determined. For the example given, the characters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned. More
examples of Label ID settings are provided in Table 36.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Label ID entry.
7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology.
Figure 18. Label ID Position Options

Prefix

Label ID

Aim ID

Bar Code Data

Label ID

Suffix

OR

274

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Data Editing
Table 36. Label ID Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code

(Scanner enters Programming Mode)

2.

Determine placement of the
Label ID characters BEFORE or
AFTER with regard to scanned Enable as Prefix
data using "Label ID
Control" starting on page 81

Enable as Suffix

Enable as Prefix

Enable as Suffix

3.

Scan the bar code selecting
the symbology type you wish
to designate label ID
DataBar
characters for using "Label ID
Omnidirectional
Symbology Selection • 1D
Symbologies" starting on page
82.

Code 39

Interleaved 2 of 5

Code 32

4.

Custom Label ID example
(desired characters):

D B *

=C3

+

PH

5.

Find hex equivalents from the
ASCII Chart(inside back
cover), then scan in these
digits/characters using the bar
codes in the section:
"Keypad" starting on page 319.
If you make a mistake before
the last character, scan the
CANCEL bar code to abort and
not save the entry string. You
can then start again at the
beginning.

44 42 2A

3D 43 33

2B

50 48

6.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code

(Scanner exits Label ID entry)

7.

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code
once again

(Scanner exits Programming Mode)

Result:

Product Reference Guide

DB*[bar code
data]

[bar code
data]=C3

+[bar code data]

[bar code data]PH

275

References

Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs
represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will
be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to
convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following:
41423132FFFFFFFF
The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and the
second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs are
FFFF and FFFF.
With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character conversion: BB22BB22.
The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to 2
characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF.
To set Character Conversion:
1. Go to page 88 and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.
2. Scan the “Configure Character Conversion” bar code.
3. Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the
equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.
4. Turn to Appendix D, Keypad and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters determined in the previous step.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Programming Mode.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/
EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

276

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Reading Parameters

Reading Parameters
Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good
read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550
milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good read
LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020, etc.
3. Go to page 96 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 37 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 37. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

Good Read LED
stays on until next
trigger pull (00)

20ms

150ms

2550ms (2.55 sec.)

2

Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes)

000

002

015

255

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING

5

Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’

‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

277

References

Scanning Features
Scan Mode
This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation. Selects the scan operating mode
for the reader. The following selections are valid for all models:
Trigger Single: When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the following
occurs:
- Scanning Active Time has elapsed
- a label has been read
- the trigger is released
Trigger Hold Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until
the trigger is released or Scanning Active Time has elapsed. Reading a label does not disable
scanning. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in
this mode.
Trigger Pulse Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated until
Scanning Active Time has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again. Double
Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
Flashing: The reader flashes on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is controlled by
Flash On Time and Flash Off Time. When Flash is ON the imager reads continuously; when
Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.
Always On: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is continually on. If the
trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it is in Trigger Single Mode. Double Read Timeout
prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
Stand Mode: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is turned on automatically
when an item is placed in the reader’s field of view. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it
in single read mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads while in this
mode.

278

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Stand Mode Off Time
This feature specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger
when in Stand Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms
to 16 seconds).
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 20 = 20,
etc.
3. Go to page 101 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: Set Stand Mode Illuminator Off Time.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication
after the last character.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 38 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 38. Stand Mode Off Time
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

500 ms

1 Second

5.5 Seconds

16 Seconds

2

Pad leading zero

01

02

11

32

‘1’ and ‘1’

‘3’ and ‘2’

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT STAND MODE OFF TIME

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’ and ‘2’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

279

References

Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is
entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20
= 020, etc.
3. Go to page 101 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 39 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 39. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

1 Second

90 Sec. (1.5 min.)

2

Pad leading zero(es)

001

090

180 Sec. (3 min.) 255 Seconds (4.25 min.)
180

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING

5
6

280

Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’

‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Aiming Duration Time
Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger
single mode. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20
= 020, etc.
3. Go to page 104 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 40 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 40. Aiming Duration Time Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

1 Second

90 Sec. (1.5 min.)

2

Pad leading zero(es)

001

090

180 Sec. (3 min.) 255 Seconds (4.25 min.)
180

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING

5

Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’

‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’

‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’

255

‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

281

References

Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 102 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication
after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 41 for examples of how to set this feature.

Table 41. Flash On Time Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

500ms

1,000ms (1 sec.)

5200ms (5.2 sec.)

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

2

Divide by 100 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield two
digits)

05

10

52

99

‘5’ and ‘2’

‘9’ and ‘9’

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING

5
6

282

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘1’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features

Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 103 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 42 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 42. Flash Off Time Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

500ms

1,000ms (1 sec.)

5200ms (5.2 sec.)

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

2

Divide by 100 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield two
digits)

05

10

52

99

‘5’ and ‘2’

‘9’ and ‘9’

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘1’ and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

283

References

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
This feature Specifies the transmission ordering by symbology type, when Multiple Labels per
Frame is enabled.Up to six symbologies can be selected. Zeroes must be added to pad the string
to 12 characters if not using all six symbologies.
The labels are ordered first as specified in the output mask. Labels present in the volume but not
specified will be transmitted as unspecified symbologies in random order as allowed by the
reading time sequence. For each label decoded in the volume the reader signals the standard
beeper and LED indications.
To specify the symbology order:
1. Determine the symbologies and order you want to specify.
2. Use Table 44 on page 285 to find the hex values for up to six symbologies.
3. Go to page 110 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: “SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING”.
5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above.
6. Scan zeroes if needed to make a 12-character string.
7. When finished, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 43 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 43. Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired symbology

Code 39

Data Matrix

Code 128

Aztec

2

Hex equivalent from Table 44

24

0E

0C

4E

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
RESULT

6

‘2’ and ‘4’

‘0’ and ‘E’

‘0’ and ‘C’

‘4’ and ‘E’

0x240E0C4E0000
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Table 44 on page 285 shows the hex value associated with each symbology.

284

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Scanning Features
Table 44. Symbology Hex Values
Hex
Value Symbology ID
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B

Product Reference Guide

Don't care
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN8
EAN13
UPC2
UPC5
C128_ADDON
EAN128
C128_PROGRAMMING_LABEL
CODE128
FNC3_C128_LABEL
DATA MATRIX
MAXICODE
QRCODE
Reserved
Reserved
CODE49
UPC-E2
UPC-E5
Reserved
UPC-A2
UPC-A5
Reserved
EAN82
EAN85
Reserved
EAN132
EAN135
EAN138
ISBN_ID
TWO_LABEL_PAIR
I2OF5
CODABAR
CODE39
PHARMAC39
MSI_PLESSEY
CODE93
RSS_EXP_ID
RSS_14_ID
GTIN
GTIN2

Hex
Value
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
FF

Symbology ID

GTIN5
GTIN8
S2OF5
PDF417
CODE11
IATA
MICRO_PDF
GS1 DataBar_LIM_ID
GS1 DataBar_LIM_COMP
GS1 DataBar_Omnidirectional_COMP
GS1 DataBar_EXP_COMP
GENERIC_DATA
CC_A
CC_B
CC_C
LABELIMAGE
CAPTURE_IMAGE_LABEL
Reserved
M2OF5
D2OF5
PLESSEY65
ISSN
ISBT
Reserved
TIMER_EXPIRED_EVENT
FOLLETT_2OF5
Reserved
Reserved
CODE39_CIP
ABC_CODABAR
I2OF5_CIP
C2OF5
IND2OF5
AZTEC
UPC-E_COMP
UPC-A_COMP
EAN8_COMP
EAN13_COMP
EAN128_COMP
DATA MATRIX_PROGRAMMING_LABEL
LABEL_ID_MAX
INVALID_LABEL_TYPE

285

References

RF Features
Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations
synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this change is
automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the base station's
configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the reader's configuration
will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled.

RF Address Stamping
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio
address when address stamping is enabled.
This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on
page 245 is enabled.

Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:
1. Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the ASCII Chart
on the inside back cover. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.
2. Go to page 246 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the bar code: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the hexadecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.
Table 45. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

No delimiter
character

, (comma)

- (dash)

2

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3

Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMiTER CHARACTER

4
5

286

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

‘0’ and ‘0’

‘2’ and ‘C’

‘2’ and ‘D’

/ (slash)

‘2’ AND ‘F’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

RF Features

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and
Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the
same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 25 =
25, etc
3. Go to page 251 and scanScan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 46 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 46. STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

2 Seconds

5 Seconds

10 Seconds

25 Seconds

2

Pad with leading zero(es)

02

05

10

25

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECTSTAR RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’ and ‘2’

‘0’ and ‘5’

‘1’ and ‘0’

‘2’ AND ‘5’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

287

References

BT-Only Features
BT Pin Code
This option specifies the 4-character or 16-character pin code to be used for authentication of
the BT link. To set the pin code:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming
Mode, then enable "BT Security Mode" on page 247.
2. Specify the desired pin code length (4 or 16) by scanning the appropriate bar code in
"Select PIN Code Length" on page 248.
3. Determine the desired characters. For example, D254 or STOR12345678135M
4. Convert the characters to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of
this manual.
5. Go to page 248 and Scan the bar code: SET 4 CHAR PIN CODE or SET 16-CHAR
PIN CODE.
6. Scan the appropriate alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad,
representing the hexadecimal entries determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be
relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting,
the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin.
After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

Table 47. BT Pin Code Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

1

Desired Setting

2

Convert the characters to
hexadecimal

EXAMPLES
D254

STOR12345678135M

44 32 35 34

53 54 4F 52 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 33 35 4D

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SET BT PIN CODE

5

Scan 8 or 32 Alphanumeric
Characters From Appendix

44323534

53544F5231323334353637383133354D

D, Keypad
6

288

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Motion Features

Motion Features
Motionless Timeout
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader takes to assume that it is in a motionless
condition. The range for this setting is from 500 msec to 25.5 seconds, in 100 millisecond
increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0.5 = 0005 = 00, 5 =
050, 20 = 200, etc.
3. Go to page 254 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the bar code: SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 48 for examples of how to set this feature.

Table 48. Motionless Timeout Setting Examples
STEP

ACTION

EXAMPLES

1

Desired Setting

500ms

1 sec.

10 sec

9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

2

Divide by 100 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield two
digits)

005

010

100

250

3

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4

Scan SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING

5

Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad

6

Product Reference Guide

‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’

‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘0’

‘1’, ‘0’, and ‘0’

‘2’, ‘5’, and ‘0’

Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

289

References

NOTES

290

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Chapter 5
Message Formatting
Message Formatting
Message Formatting is only available for the Gryphon™ Wireless
model.

A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules:
• If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the Host replay
must have address field and delimiter too. Otherwise the message will be ignored. Address
delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled.
• Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the Gryphon I, especially
when more than one handheld is linked to the same base. Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration. If address stamping is not enabled,
the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base.
• The maximum character length for messages is 48.
• Messages end with “CR” 0x0D ASCII character. The CR character cannot be contained
in the middle.
• Messages cannot start with '$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode command
• Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set to
Ignore.
• Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require
Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When messages are sent not
in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character and could be sent in any
transmit mode setting.
• Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message: 
“00 00 00 00 2A AA”
• In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state.
The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE 
The format of a generic message From Host to HH is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE 
where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character.
[Items in square brackets are optional.]

Product Reference Guide

291

Message Formatting
•

If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host, you will also probably want to
disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the cradle. (See "Wireless Beeper Features" on page 236).

The message field can store plain text and escape sequences.
• Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.

LED and Beeper Control
ESC [ 0 q
ESC [ 1 q
ESC [ 2 q
ESC [ 3 q
ESC [ 4 q
ESC [ 5 q
ESC [ 6 q
ESC [ 7 q
ESC [ 8 q
ESC [ 9 q
ESC [ 0 r
ESC [ 1 r

Emit short High tone + short delay
Emit short Low tone + short delay
Emit long Low tone + short delay
Emit good read tone
Emit bad tx tone
Wait 100 ms
Turn on the green LED
Turn off the green LED
Turn on the green spot
Turn off the green spot
Beep for Find me function (new)
Power-off (new)

The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of time
and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be controlled by the
system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.

Example:
Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the
green LED.
ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 5 q ESC [ 7 q Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED.
ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 3 q ESC [ 7 q

Escape sequences different from those listed will be ignored.

292

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Table 49 contains Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment and Regulatory
information.
Table 49. Technical Specifications
Item

Description
GD44XX

GBT4400/GM440X

Physical Characteristics

Color

White or Black
Height 7.1”/181 mm
Length 3.9”/100 mm
Width 2.8”/71 mm

Height 7.1”/181 mm
Length 3.9”/100 mm
Width 2.8”/71 mm

Approximately 6.9 ounces /195.6 g

GBT4400/GM440X Handheld Unit:
Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 g
Base Station/Charger: Approximately
8.7 ounces/246 g

Battery Type

N/A

Li-Ion battery pack

Typical charge time for full
charge from full discharge

N/A

4 hours with 12V external power supply
adaptera

N/A

Max 22 hours with Host power
(In this case no supply adapter is
needed)a

N/A

scans typical/fully charged battery
GBT4400 >50,000 reads
GM440X 60,000 reads (typical)

Dimensions

Weight (without cable)

Electrical Characteristics

Operating autonomy 
(continuous reading)

Base Station Consumption
and DC input supply range

Product Reference Guide

N/A

Volt 4.75-14 VDC; Power <8Wb;
Imax 500mA when in host/bus
powered modeb

293

Item

Description

Performance Characteristics

Scanning Illumination
Source

LEDs

Aiming Source

Laser Class 2

Roll (Tilt) Anglec

Up to ± 180°

Pitch Anglec

± 40°

Skew (Yaw) Anglec

± 40°

Field of View

40° Hx26° V

Depth of Field (Typical) d

Symbology

Standard Range (SR) Models
433, 910, BT, D
5mil: 1.6” -7.5” (4.0 -19cm)

Code 39

10mil: 0.4” - 11.8” (1.0 - 30cm)
20mil: up to 17.7” (up to 45cm)

EAN

PDF 417

Data Matrix

QR Code

Minimum Element Width

Print Contrast Minimum

294

High Density (HD) Models
BT, D only
3mil: 0.9” - 3.6” (2.4 - 9.1cm)
5 mil: 0.3” - 4.5” (0.8 -11.3cm)

7.5mil: 0.5” - 10.6” (2.0 - 27cm)

7.5mil: 0” - 5” (0 - 12.7cm)

13mil: 0.6” - 15.7” (1.5 - 40cm)

13mil: 4.3” - 6.8” (1.1- 17.2cm)

6.6mil: 1.0” - 5.9” (2.5 - 15cm)

4mil: 0.7” - 2.7” (1.8 - 6.8cm)

10mil: 0.2” - 8.6” (0.5 - 22cm)

6.6mil: 0.1” - 4.4” (0.1 - 11.2cm)

15mil: 0.6” - 13.4” (1.5 - 34cm)

10mil: 0” - 5.6” (0 - 14.3cm)

10mil: 0.8” to 6.3” (2.0 - 16cm)
15mil: 0” to 9.3” (0 - 23.6cm)
10mil: 1.2” to 4.9” (3.0 - 12.5cm)
15mil: 0.4” to 7.5” (1.0 - 19cm)
Standard Range:
1D Minimum Resolution = 4 mil
PDF-417 Minimum Resolution = 5 mil
Data Matrix Minimum Resolution = 7 mil

5mil: 1.1” - 2.4” (2.8-6.1cm)

6.7mil: 0.8” - 1.7” (2.1 - 4.2cm)
High Density:
1D Minimum Resolution = 2.5 mil
PDF-417 Minimum Resolution = 4 mil
Data Matrix Minimum Resolution = 5
mil

25% minimum reflectance

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Item

Description
1D Bar Codes
UPC/EAN/JAN (A, E, 13, 8); UPC/EAN/JAN (including P2 /P5); UPC/EAN/JAN (including;
ISBN /Bookland & ISSN); UPC/EAN Coupons; Code 39 (including full ASCII); Code 39 Trioptic; Code39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical); LOGMARS (Code 39 w/ standard check digit
enabled); Danish PPT; Code 32 (Italian Pharmacode 39); Code 128; Code 128 ISBT; Interleaved 2 of 5; Standard 2 of 5; Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP (HR); Industrial 2 of 5; Discrete 2 of
5; IATA 2of5 Air cargo code; Code 11; Codabar; ABC Codabar; Code 93; MSI; PZN; Plessey;
Anker Plessey; Follett 2 of 5; GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional; GS1 DataBar Limited; GS1
DataBar Expanded; GS1 DataBar Truncated; DATABAR Expanded Coupon.
2D / Stacked Codes

Decode Capability

The Gryphon I GBT4400 scanner is capable of decoding the following symbologies
using multiple frames (i.e. Multi-Frame Decoding): PDF-417; QR Code; Aztec; Data
Matrix; Inverse Data Matrix; Data Matrix is configurable for the following parameters:;
Normal or Inverted; Square or Rectangular Style; Data length (1 - 3600 characters); Maxicode; QR Codes (QR and Multiple QR Codes); Aztec; Postal Codes; Australian Post; Japanese Post; KIX Post; Planet Code; Postnet; Royal Mail Code (RM45CC); Intelligent Mail Bar
Code (IMB); Sweden Post; Portugal Post; LaPoste A/R 39; 4-State Canada; PDF-417;
Micro PDF417; GS1 Composites (1 - 12); French CIP13e; GS1 DataBar Stacked; GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional; GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked; GSI Databar Composites;
Chinese Sensible Code; Inverted 2D codes.
Note: The reader can apply the Normal/Reverse Decoding Control to the following symbologies: Data Matrix, QR, Aztec and Chinese Sensible Code.

Interfaces Supportedf

RS-232 Std, RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf, RS-232 OPOS, IBM 46xx (ports5B and 9B), USB Com
Std., USB Keyboard, USB Alternate Keyboard, USB OEM, Keyboard Wedge (AT with or w/
o Alternate Key, IBM AT PS2 with or w/o Alternate Key, PC-XT, IBM 3153, IBM Terminals
31xx, 32xx,34xx, 37xx make only and make break keyboard, Digital Terminals VT2x,
VT3xx, VT4xx, and Apple) and Wand Emulation (BT model only).

a.
b.
c.
d.

Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition.
Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.
Based on ISO 15423 specifications
13 mils DOF based on EAN. All other 1D codes are Code 39. All labels grade A, typical environmental light,
20°C, label inclination 10°
e. It is acceptable to handle this with ULE.
f. See "Interface Selection"on page 29 for a listing of available interface sets by model type.

Product Reference Guide

295

Item

Description

User Environment

GD44XX Models

GBT Models

Operating Temperature

32° to 131° F (0° to 55°
C)

32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)

Charging Temperature

N/A

32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)

Storage Temperature
Humidity

-4° to 158° F (-20° to 70° C)
Operating: 5% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing

Drop Specifications

Scanner withstands 18 drops from 1.8 meters (5.9 feet) to concrete

Ambient Light
Immunity

Up to 100,000 Lux

Contaminants
Spray/Rain/
Dust/Particulates

IEC 529-IP52

ESD Level

16 KV

Regulatory

Electrical Safety

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, IEC 60950
GD44XX Models

GBT Models

GM44 433 Models

North America (FCC) :
Part 15 Class B; Canada (
IC) : ICES-003 Class B;
Russia ( Gost); European
Union EMC Directive;
VCCI-Japan; Korean KCC;
Taiwan EMC (BSMI); 
Australia (ACMA)

Europe - CE; Australia C-tick; Russia – GOST;
USA/CANADA – FCC/IC;
Japan – JRF/VCCI; Mexico - NOM + Cofetel;
South Korea - KCC; Brazil - ANATEL; Argentina CNC; China - SRRC;
Malaysia - SIRIM; Indonesia, Singapore - IDA;
Taiwan - NCC; Philippines - NTC

Europe - CE; Australia C-tick; Russia – GOST;
Singapore - IDA; China SRRC; Brazil - ANATEL

EMI/RFI

GM44 910 Models

USA/CANADA – FCC/IC;
Mexico - NOM + Cofetel;

IEC Class 2
Laser Safety

Radiation 1 mW Avg., Emitted wavelength 650 nm, 12ms pulse, Beam Divergence 8.4 deg x 8.1 deg ("plus" pattern).
Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

296

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Imager Labeling
Sample labels are shown for illustrative purposes only. Please view the labels on your product for
actual details, as they may vary from those depicted.
Scanner Regulatory Label

Base Station Label

C
PATENTS PENDING

239045

US

Radio Features
Radio Features

BT

433 model

910 model

Frequency Range

2400 to 2483.5 MHz

433.92 MHz

910.00 MHz

Range (in open air)

30m

30m

30m

For Star Models: Max number of devices per base station = 16

Product Reference Guide

297

Standard Cable Pinouts
Figure 19, Figure 20 and Table 50 provide standard pinout information for the interface cable.
Figure 19. Standard Cable Pinouts: Handheld

Bottom of Scanner
Cable Strain Relief

Pin 10

To Host
Pin 1

Cable

Cable Clip (Latch)
Interface Cable Port

Figure 20. Standard Cable Pinouts: Base Station

1

4

2

8

7
3

5

6

The signal descriptions in Table 50 apply to the connector on the reader and are for reference
only.

298

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Table 50. Standard Cable Pinouts — Handheld (GD44XX model) or Base Station (GBT4400
and GM44XX Star models) Side
Pin

RS-232

1

RTS (out)

USB

Keyboard Wedge

2

D+

CLKIN (KBD side)

3

D-

DATAIN (KBD side)

GND

GND

GND

VCC

VCC

VCC

4

GND

5

RX

6

TX

7

VCC

OEM

8

IBM_B

CLKOUT (PC side)

9

IBM_A

DATAOUT (PC side)

10

Product Reference Guide

CTS (in)

299

LED and Beeper Indications
The reader’s beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or errors on
the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The tables below list these
indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is that the reader’s functions are
programmable, and may or may not be turned on. For example, certain indications such as the
power-up beep can be disabled using programming bar code labels.
Table 51. LED and Beeper Indications
INDICATION

DESCRIPTION

LED

BEEPER
Reader beeps four times at highest frequency and volume upon
power-up.

Power-up Beep

The reader is in the process of
powering-up.

Good Read Beep

A label has been successfully
scanned by the reader.

ROM Failure

There is an error in the reader's
software/programming

Limited Scanning
Label Read

Indicates that a host connection
is not established when the IBM
or USB interface is enabled.

N/A

Reader Active
Mode

The reader is active and ready to
scan.

The LED is lit steadilya

Reader
Disabled

The reader has been disabled by
the host.

Green Spot is on
continuously

While in Stand Mode or Trigger
Stand Mode the green spot shall
be on while in stand watch state.

N/A

N/A

Green Spota
flashes momentarily

Upon successful read of a label,
the software shall turn the green
spot on for the time specified by
the configured value.

N/A

N/A

Image Capture

When ready to capture image

Blue light flashes 2 times
when updating

N/A

LED behavior for this indication is configurable via
the feature “Good Read:
When to Indicate”

The reader will beep once at current frequency, volume, mono/
bi-tonal setting and duration
upon a successful label scan.

Flashes

Reader sounds one error beep at
highest volume.
Reader 'chirps' six times at the
highest frequency and current
volume.

The LED blinks continuously

N/A
N/A

a. Except when in sleep mode or when a Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected

300

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Table 52. Programming Mode Indications
Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode.
Label Programming Mode Entry

A valid programming label has
been scanned.

LED blinks continuously

Reader sounds four low frequency beeps.

Label Programming Mode
Rejection of Label

A label has been rejected.

N/A

Reader sounds three times at
lowest frequency & current volume.

Label Programming Mode
Acceptance of
Partial Label

In cases where multiple labels
must be scanned to program one
feature, this indication acknowledges each portion as it is successfully scanned.

N/A

Reader sounds one short beep
at highest frequency & current
volume.

Label Programming Mode
Acceptance of
Programming

Configuration option(s) have
been successfully programmed
via labels and the reader has
exited Programming Mode.

N/A

Reader sounds one high frequency beep and 4 low frequency beeps followed by reset
beeps.

Label Programming Mode Cancel Item Entry

Cancel label has been scanned.

N/A

Reader sounds two times at low
frequency and current volume.

Error Codes
Upon startup, if the reader sounds a long tone, this means the reader has not passed its
automatic Selftest and has entered FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) isolation mode. If the reader is
reset, the sequence will be repeated. The following table describes the LED flashes/beep codes
associated with an error found.

NUMBER OF LED
FLASHES/BEEPS

ERROR
All Models:
GD44XX, GBT4400, GM44XX

1

Configuration

2

Interface PCB

6

Digital PCB

12

Imager

15

Accelerometer

Product Reference Guide

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Contact Helpdesk for assistance

301

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)
INDICATION

LEDS

Power-up Complete

Yellow LED on

Reader Disabled by the HOST or the communication
with HOST is not established

Yellow LED blinking ~1Hz

Data/labels are transmitted to the HOST

Yellow LEDs turned off for 100mSec

Programming Mode

Yellow LED blinks quickly

Configuration alignment with the handheld is in
progress

Red LED blinks quickly

Battery charging in progress

Red LED on

Battery charging complete

Green LED on

Battery charger error

Green LED and Red LEDs blink alternatively
~1Hz

No handheld is placed on the cradle

Red and Green LEDs off

Base Station Button Indicators
BUTTON PUSH
EVENT

CORDLESS

RED
INDICATOR(**)

GREEN
INDICATOR(**)

Push at power-up

force device connection
(Aladdin)

Off

Slow blink
Fast blink

< 1 sec (*)

UV LED On/Off

Off

Off

1 to 5 sec

Paging

Off

Fast blink

5 to 10 sec

Unlink (Only BT)

Off

Slow blink

10 to 15 sec

Reset

Fast blink

Off

15 to 20 sec

Restore custom defaults

Slow blink

Off

> 20 sec

No action

Off

Off

*Only for models with UV Counterfeit Money Detector, see page 13 for more details.

302

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix B
Standard Defaults
The most common configuration settings are listed in the “Default” column of the table below.
Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming bar codes for each
parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your preferred default settings for
these same configurable features.
Table 53. Standard Defaults
Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore

Obey

39

Disable

39

Baud Rate

9600

42

Data Bits

8 Data Bits

43

Stop Bits

1 Stop Bit

43

None

44

RTS

45

No Delay

47

Beep On ASCII BEL

Disable

47

Beep On Not on File

Enable

48

ACK NAK Options

Disable

49

ACK Character

‘ACK’

50

NAK Character

‘NAK’

50

ACK NAK Timeout Value

200 ms

51

ACK NAK Retry Count

3 Retries

51

Ignore Errors Detected

52

Enable

52

USB Suspend Mode
RS-232 ONLY

Parity
Handshaking Control
RS-232/USB-Com

Intercharacter Delay

ACK NAK Error Handling
Indicate Transmission Failure

Product Reference Guide

303

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Disable Character

‘D’

53

Enable Character

‘E’

53

U.S. Keyboard

56

00

60

100 ms

61

Intercode Delay

No Delay

61

Caps Lock State

Caps Lock OFF

62

Numlock

NumLock Key
Unchanged

62

1 ms

63

Standard Keys

64

Handheld

66

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

66

6

68

IBM Standard Format

70

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

70

660 ms

72

Quiet Zones & Spaces
Low, Bars High

72

Wand Idle State

High

73

Transmit Noise

Disable

73

No conversion

74

No Global Prefix
Global Suffix = 0x0D
(CR)

76

KEYBOARD WEDGE

Country Mode
Send Control Characters
Wedge Quiet Interval

USB Keyboard Speed
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad
USB-OEM

USB-OEM Device Usage
Interface Options
IBM 46xx

46xx Number of Host Resets
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
Interface Options
Wand Emulation (BT model only)

Wand Signal Speed
Wand Polarity

Label Symbology Conversion
Data Format

Global Prefix/Suffix

304

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Global AIM ID

Disable

77

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128

Enable

79

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets

EU Set

80

Individually Set Label ID

Disable

81

Case Conversion

Disable

87

No Char Conversion

88

0.6 Second

89

Power-up Beep

92

After Decode

92

Good Read Beep Type

Mono

93

Good Read Beep Frequency

High

93

Good Read Beep Length

80 ms

94

Good Read Beep Volume

High

95

Good Read LED Duration

300 ms

96

Trigger Single

97

Disable

98

Switch to Stand Mode

99

Pick Mode

Disable

100

Stand Mode Sensitivity

Medium

100

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time

2 Seconds

101

Scanning Active Time

5 Seconds

101

OFF

102

Flash On Time

10 = Flash is ON for 1
Second

103

Flash Off Time

06 = Flash is OFF for
600ms

103

Aiming Pointer

Enable

104

Aiming Off
After Decoding

104

300 ms

105

Character Conversion
READING PARAMETERS

Double Read Timeout
Power On Alert
Good Read: When to Indicate

Scanning Features
Scan Mode
Stand Mode Indication
Stand Operation

Stand Illumination Control

Aiming Duration Timer
Green Spot Duration

Product Reference Guide

305

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Mobile Phone Mode

Enable

105

Partial Label Reading Control

Enable

106

Decode Negative Image

Disable

106

Corded Stand Mode

Disable

107

Corded Stand Beep

Disable

108

Disable

109

Random Order

110

Disable

110

Enable only UPCA
coupon decoding

113

Enable

114

Send

114

Don’t Expand

115

Transmit

115

2D Component Not
Required

116

Enable

116

Send

117

2D Component Not
Required

117

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Don’t Expand

118

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Don’t Expand

118

Transmit

119

Disable

119

Corded Only Features

Multiple Label Reading
Multiple Labels per Frame
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology
Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length
CODE SELECTION - 1D SYMBOLOGIES
Code EAN/UPC

Coupon Control
UPC-A
UPC-A Enable/Disable
UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
UPC-A 2D Component
UPC-E
UPC-E Enable/Disable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission
UPC-E 2D Component

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
GTIN
GTIN Formatting

306

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

EAN 13 (Jan 13)
Enable

120

Send

120

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character

Transmit

121

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion

Disable

121

EAN-13 2D Component

2D Component Not
Required

122

Disable

122

Enable

123

Send

123

Disable

124

2D Component Not
Required

124

Disable

125

Two Modules

126

Disable P2, P5 and P8

127

70 ms

128

Disable

131

Enable

134

Calculate Std Check

134

Send

135

Don’t Transmit

136

Disable

136

Small Quiet Zones on
two sides

137

Variable

137

2

138

EAN 13 Enable/Disable
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission

ISSN
ISSN Enable/Disable
EAN 8
EAN 8 Enable/Disable
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13
EAN 8 2D Component
UPC/EAN Global Settings
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check
UPC/EAN Quiet Zones
Add-Ons
Optional Add-ons
Optional Add-On Timer
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
Code 39
Code 39 Enable/Disable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Code 39 Full ASCII
Code 39 Quiet Zones
Code 39 Length Control
Code 39 Set Length 1

Product Reference Guide

307

Parameter
Code 39 Set Length 2

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

50

139

Disable

140

Disable

140

Don’t Send

141

Don’t Transmit

141

Disable

142

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable

Disable

142

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable

Disable

143

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable

Disable

143

Enable

144

Don’t Expand

144

Code 128 Check Character Transmission

Don’t Send

145

Code 128 Function Character Transmission

Don’t Send

145

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission

Disable

146

Small Quiet Zones on
two sides

146

Variable

147

Code 128 Set Length 1

1

148

Code 128 Set Length 2

80

149

Transmit in Code 128
Data Format

150

Disable

150

ISBT 128 Concatenation

Disable

151

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation

Disable

151

Trioptic Code
Trioptic Code Enable/Disable
Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 32 Enable/Disable
Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable
Special Codes

Code 128
Code 128 Enable/Disable
Expand Code 128 to Code 39

Code 128 Quiet Zones
Code 128 Length Control

GS1-128
GS1-128 Enable
GS1-128 2D Component
ISBT 128

308

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Static

152

200 msec

153

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Disable

154

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Disable

155

Send

156

Variable

156

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1

6

157

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2

50

158

Disable

159

Disable

159

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Disable

160

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Disable

160

Send

161

Variable

161

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1

8

162

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2

50

163

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable

Disable

164

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Disable

164

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enable

165

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control

Variable

165

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1

1

166

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2

50

167

IATA Enable/Disable

Disable

168

IATA Check Character Transmission

Enable

168

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Interleaved 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
I 2 of 5 Length Control

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable
Follett 2 of 5
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

Industrial 2 of 5

Code IATA

Product Reference Guide

309

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Codabar
Codabar Enable/Disable

Disable

169

Don’t Calculate

169

Send

170

Transmit

170

abcd/abcd

171

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match

Don’t Require Match

171

Codabar Quiet Zones

Small Quiet Zones on
two sides

172

Variable

172

Codabar Set Length 1

3

173

Codabar Set Length 2

50

174

Disable

175

Disable

175

Static

175

200 msec

176

Disable

177

Disable

178

Check C and K

178

Send

179

Variable

179

Code 11 Set Length 1

4

180

Code 11 Set Length 2

50

181

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable

Disable

182

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128
Emulation

Disable

182

2D component not
required

183

Codabar Check Character Calculation
Codabar Check Character Transmission
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set

Codabar Length Control

ABC Codabar
ABC Codabar
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
Code 11
Code 11 Enable/Disable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
Code 11 Check Character Transmission
Code 11 Length Control

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

310

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable

Disable

183

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation

Disable

184

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component

2D component not
required

184

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control

Variable

185

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1

1

186

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2

74

187

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable

Disable

188

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation

Disable

188

2D component not
required

189

Disable

189

Enable Check C and K

190

Code 93 Check Character Transmission

Enable

190

Code 93 Length Control

Variable

191

Code 93 Set Length 1

1

192

Code 93 Set Length 2

50

193

Code 93 Quiet Zones

Small Quiet Zones on
two sides

194

Disable

194

Enable Mod10

195

MSI Check Character Transmission

Enable

195

MSI Length Control

Variable

197

MSI Set Length 1

1

197

MSI Set Length 2

50

198

Disable

199

Enable Plessey std.
check char. verification

199

GS1 DataBar™ Limited

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component
Code 93
Code 93 Enable/Disable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation

MSI
MSI Enable/Disable
MSI Check Character Calculation

Plessey
Plessey Enable/Disable
Plessey Check Character Calculation

Product Reference Guide

311

Parameter

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Plessey Check Character Transmission

Enable

200

Plessey Length Control

Variable

200

Plessey Set Length 1

1

201

Plessey Set Length 2

50

202

350msec

204

2D Structured Append

Disable

205

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control

Normal

205

Aztec Code Enable / Disable

Disable

206

Aztec Code Length Control

Enable

206

Aztec Code Length Control

Variable

206

1

207

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable

Disable

209

China Sensible Code Length Control

Variable

209

China Sensible Code Set Length 1

1

210

China Sensible Code Set Length 2

7,827

211

Data Matrix Enable / Disable

Enable

212

Both Square and
Rectangular style

212

Variable

213

Data Matrix Set Length 1

1

213

Data Matrix Set Length 2

3,116

214

Maxicode Enable / Disable

Disable

215

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission

Disable

215

Maxicode Length Control

Variable

216

Maxicode Set Length 1

1

216

Maxicode Set Length 2

0145

217

PDF417 Enable / Disable

Enable

218

PDF417 Length Control

Variable

218

PDF417 Set Length 1

1

219

PDF417 Set Length 2

2,710

220

CODE SELECTION - 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Maximum Decoding Time

Aztec Code Set Length 1

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style
Data Matrix Length Control

312

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Parameter
Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

Disable

221

Micro PDF AIM ID and
label type

221

Variable

222

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1

1

222

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2

0366

223

QR Code Enable / Disable

Enable

224

QR Code Length Control

Variable

224

QR Code Set Length 1

1

225

QR Code Set Length 2

7,089

226

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable

Disable

227

Micro QR Code Length Control

Variable

227

Micro QR Code Set Length 1

0001

228

Micro QR Code Set Length 2

0035

229

UCC Composite Enable / Disable

Disable

230

UCC Optional Composite Timer

Timer Disabled

231

Disable all Postal codes

232

Disable

233

Enable

236

Low

236

Beep Duration

80 msec

237

Beep Volume

High

238

Disconnect Beep

Enable

238

Docking Beep

Enable

239

Leash Alarm

Disable

239

Automatic Configuration Update

Enable

241

Copy Configuration to Scanner

N/A

241

Copy Configuration to Base Station

N/A

241

Batch Mode

Disable

242

Send Batch

N/A

242

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation
Micro PDF417 Length Control

Postal Code Selection
Postnet BB Control
WIRELESS Features

Good Transmission Beep
Beep Frequency

Product Reference Guide

313

Parameter
Erase Batch Memory

Default

Your Setting

Page
Number

N/A

243

No Delay

243

Unlink Label Required

244

Do not include

245

No Delimiter Character

246

2 Seconds

246

Disable

247

Select PIN Code Length

4-character BT PIN Code

248

Set PIN Code

31323334 =
Default Pin Code is 1234

248

BT Poll Rate

20 ms

249

30 minutes

250

2 seconds

251

ACK from cradle

252

Enable

253

Medium

254

2 seconds

254

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Direct Radio Autolink
Features for BT Models Only

Source Radio Address Transmission
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
Link Timeout
BT Security Features
BT Security Mode

Powerdown Timeout
Features for Star Models Only
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Motion Features
Motion Aiming Control
Motion Sensitivity
Motionless Timeout

314

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix C
Sample Bar Codes
The sample bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types.

1D Bar Codes
UPC-A

EAN-13

978033029095
Code 39

Code 128

Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5

Product Reference Guide

315

Sample Bar Codes — continued

Code 32

Codabar

13579

Code 93

Code 11

123456789

316

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)
GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see GS1 DataBar™
Omnidirectional on page 182).

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

1234890hjio9900mnb
GS1 DataBar™ Limited

08672345650916

GS1 DataBar™-14
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated

55432198673467
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

90876523412674
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

78123465709811

Product Reference Guide

317

2D Bar Codes
Aztec

Datamatrix

China Sensible Code

MaxiCode

PDF 417

Micro PDF 417

ABCabc
BV17453

QR Code

Micro QR Code

123456
35900G9

UCC Composite

318

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix D
Keypad
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/characters from a
keypad.

Product Reference Guide

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

319

320

A

B

C

D

E

F

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Appendix E
Scancode Tables
Control Character Emulation
Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this appendix.
Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables. These apply
to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.
Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys,
special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital
Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to
0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — See
page -328.)

Single Press and Release Keys
In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released and so on.
Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left ), Cr (Control Right ) Cl (Control Left ) Sh (shift).
This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys.
Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending a
label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41 0x9A.

Product Reference Guide

321

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE
Table 54. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x
1x

x0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P

x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q

x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R

x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S

x4
EOT
C(S)+D
DC4
C(S)+T

x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U

X6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V

x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W

x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X

x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y

xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z

xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc

xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C+\

xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]

xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C+^

xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_

2x

SP

!

"

#

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

`

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

8x

€

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent
(keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

9x

F12

Home

End

Pg Up

Pg Dwn









Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Ax

Cr ↑

‫‫‬

‘

ƒ

„

…

†

‡

ˆ

‰

Š

‹

Ś

‹

Œ

‫‫‬

Bx

°

±

²

³

´

µ

¶

¸

¹

º

»

¼

½

¾

¿

Cx

À

Á

Â

Ã

Ä

Å

Æ

Ç

È

É

Ê

Ë

Ì

Í

Î

Ï

Dx

Ð

‫‫‬

Ò

Ó

Ô

Õ

Ö

×

Ø

Ù

Ú

Û

Ü

Ý

Þ

ß

Ex

à

á

â

ã

ä

å

æ

ç

è

é

ê

ë

ì

í

î

ï

Fx

ð

ñ

ò

ó

ô

õ

ö

÷

ø

ù

ú

û

ü

ý

þ

ÿ

·

Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.

322

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE — cont.
Table 55. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02

0x

x0

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

X6

x7

x8

x9

xA

xB

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab



S+ Tab

Home







F1

F2

F3

F5

ESC

F7

xE

xF

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

Pg Dwn

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

`

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

8x

€

‫‫‬

‘

ƒ

„

…

†

‡

ˆ

‰

Š

‹

Ś

‹

Œ

‫‫‬

9x

‫‫‬

‘

’

“

”

•

–

—

˜

™

š

›

œ

‫‫‬

ž

Ÿ

Ax

NBSP

¡

¢

£

¤

¥

¦

§

¨

©

ª

«

¬

-

®

¯

Bx

°

±

²

³

´

µ

¶

¸

¹

º

»

¼

½

¾

¿

Cx

À

Á

Â

Ã

Ä

Å

Æ

Ç

È

É

Ê

Ë

Ì

Í

Î

Ï

Dx

Ð

‫‫‬

Ò

Ó

Ô

Õ

Ö

×

Ø

Ù

Ú

Û

Ü

Ý

Þ

ß

Ex

à

á

â

ã

ä

å

æ

ç

è

é

ê

ë

ì

í

î

ï

Fx

ð

ñ

ò

ó

ô

õ

ö

÷

ø

ù

ú

û

ü

ý

þ

ÿ

·

F4

xD

1x

323

F6

xC
Enter
Keypd

F8

F9

F10

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode
Table 56. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
x0

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

X6

x7

x8

0x

Alt+000

Alt+001

Alt+002

Alt+003

Alt+004

Alt+005

Alt+006

Alt+007

1x

Alt+016

Alt+017

Alt+018

Alt+019

Alt+020

Alt+021

Alt+022

Alt+023

Alt+024

Alt+025

Alt+026

2x

A+032

A+033

A+034

A+035

A+036

A+037

A+038

A+039

A+040

A+041

A+042

3x

A+048

A+049

A+050

A+051

A+052

A+053

A+054

A+055

A+056

A+057

4x

A+064

A+065

A+066

A+067

A+068

A+069

A+070

A+071

A+072

5x

A+080

A+081

A+082

A+083

A+084

A+085

A+086

A+087

6x

A+096

A+097

A+098

A+099

A+100

A+101

A+102

7x

A+112

A+113

A+114

A+115

A+116

A+117

8x

€

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent
(keyp)

9x

F12

Home

End

Pg Up

Ax

Cr ↑

A+0161

A+0162

Bx

A+0176

A+0177

Cx

A+0192

Dx

BS

x9
HT
TAB

xA

xB

xC

Alt+010

Alt+011

Alt+012

ESC
Esc

xD
CR
Enter

xE

Xf

Alt+014

Alt+015

Alt+028

Alt+029

Alt+030

Alt+031

A+043

A+044

A+045

A+046

A+047

A+058

A+059

A+060

A+061

A+062

A+063

A+073

A+074

A+075

A+076

A+077

A+078

A+079

A+088

A+089

A+090

A+091

A+092

A+093

A+094

A+095

A+103

A+104

A+105

A+106

A+107

A+108

A+109

A+110

A+111

A+118

A+119

A+120

A+121

A+122

A+123

A+124

A+125

A+126

A+127

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

Pg Dwn









Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

A+0163

A+0164

A+0165

A+0166

A+0167

A+0168

A+0169

A+0170

A+0171

A+0172

A+0173

A+0174

A+0175

A+0178

A+0179

A+0180

A+0181

A+0182

A+0183

A+0184

A+0185

A+0186

A+0187

A+0188

A+0189

A+0190

A+0191

A+0193

A+0194

A+0195

A+0196

A+0197

A+0198

A+0199

A+0200

A+0201

A+0202

A+0203

A+0204

A+0205

A+0206

A+0207

A+0208

A+0209

A+0210

A+0211

A+0212

A+0213

A+0214

A+0215

A+0216

A+0217

A+0218

A+0219

A+0220

A+0221

A+0222

A+0223

Ex

A+0224

A+0225

A+0226

A+0227

A+0228

A+0229

A+0230

A+0231

A+0232

A+0233

A+0234

A+0235

A+0236

A+0237

A+0238

A+0239

Fx

A+0240

A+0241

A+0242

A+0243

A+0244

A+0245

A+0246

A+0247

A+0248

A+0249

A+0250

A+0251

A+052

A+0253

A+0254

A+0255

Product Reference Guide

324

Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode — cont.
Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
x0

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

X6

x7

x8

x9

xA

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab



1x

Pg Dwn

Home







2x

A+032

A+033

A+034

A+035

A+036

A+037

A+038

A+039

A+040

A+041

A+042

A+043

A+044

A+045

A+046

A+047

3x

A+048

A+049

A+050

A+051

A+052

A+053

A+054

A+055

A+056

A+057

A+058

A+059

A+060

A+061

A+062

A+063

4x

A+064

A+065

A+066

A+067

A+068

A+069

A+070

A+071

A+072

A+073

A+074

A+075

A+076

A+077

A+078

A+079

5x

A+080

A+081

A+082

A+083

A+084

A+085

A+086

A+087

A+088

A+089

A+090

A+091

A+092

A+093

A+094

A+095

6x

A+096

A+097

A+098

A+099

A+100

A+101

A+102

A+103

A+104

A+105

A+106

A+107

A+108

A+109

A+110

A+111

7x

A+112

A+113

A+114

A+115

A+116

A+117

A+118

A+119

A+120

A+121

A+122

A+123

A+124

A+125

A+126

A+127

8x

A+0128

A+0129

A+0130

A+0131

A+0132

A+0133

A+0134

A+0135

A+0136

A+0137

A+0138

A+0139

A+0140

A+0141

A+0142

A+0143

9x

A+0144

A+0145

A+0146

A+0147

A+0148

A+0149

A+0150

A+0151

A+0152

A+0153

A+0154

A+0155

A+0156

A+0157

A+0158

A+0159

Ax

A+0160

A+0161

A+0162

A+0163

A+0164

A+0165

A+0166

A+0167

A+0168

A+0169

A+0170

A+0171

A+0172

A+0173

A+0174

A+0175

Bx

A+0176

A+0177

A+0178

A+0179

A+0180

A+0181

A+0182

A+0183

A+0184

A+0185

A+0186

A+0187

A+0188

A+0189

A+0190

A+0191

Cx

A+0192

A+0193

A+0194

A+0195

A+0196

A+0197

A+0198

A+0199

A+0200

A+0201

A+0202

A+0203

A+0204

A+0205

A+0206

A+0207

Dx

A+0208

A+0209

A+0210

A+0211

A+0212

A+0213

A+0214

A+0215

A+0216

A+0217

A+0218

A+0219

A+0220

A+0221

A+0222

A+0223

Ex

A+0224

A+0225

A+0226

A+0227

A+0228

A+0229

A+0230

A+0231

A+0232

A+0233

A+0234

A+0235

A+0236

A+0237

A+0238

A+0239

Fx

A+0240

A+0241

A+0242

A+0243

A+0244

A+0245

A+0246

A+0247

A+0248

A+0249

A+0250

A+0251

A+052

A+0253

A+0254

A+0255

325

F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

xB

xC
Enter
S+ Tab
Keypd
ESC

F7

xD

xE

xF

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

F8

F9

F10

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

Digital Interface
Table 58. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x
1x

X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P

x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q

x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R

x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S

x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T

x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U

x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V

x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W

x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X

x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y

xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z

xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc

xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\

xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]

xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^

xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

`

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent
(keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F13

F14

F15

F16









Cl ↓

Cl ↑

x4

x5

x6

x7

x8

x9

xA

xB

xC

xD

xE

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

BS

Tab

à

S+ Tab

Enter
Keypd

Enter

Ins

8x
9x

F12

Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
X0

x1

x2

x3

0x
1x







F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

xF

F10

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

`

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

~

Del

Product Reference Guide

326

IBM31xx 102-key
Table 60. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x
1x

X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P

x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q

x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R

x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S

x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T

x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U

x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V

x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W

x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X

x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y

xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z

xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc

xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\

xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]

xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^

xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent
(keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

Enter

Reset

Insert

Delete

Field -

Field +

Enter
paddle

Printl

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

xC
Enter
Keypd

xD

xE

xF

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

8x
9x

F12

Ax

Cr ↑

Del

Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
X0

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

x6

x7

x8

x9

xA

xB

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

Cr ↑

BS

Tab



S+ Tab

1x

Pg Dwn

Home







F6

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

327

Del

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

IBM XT
Table 62. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

0x
1x

X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P

x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q

x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R

x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S

x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T

x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U

x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V

x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W

x8
BS
C(S)+H
CAN
C(S)+X

x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y

xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z

xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc

xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\

xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]

xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^

xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Sh↓

Sh↑

Ins

Ent
(keyp)

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

Home

End

Pg Up

Pg Dwn









Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

Cl ↑

Cr ↓

x4

x5

x6

x7

x8

x9

xA

xB

xC

xD

xE

xF

S+ Tab

Enter
Keypd

Enter

Ins

Pg Up

8x
9x

F12

Ax

Cr ↑

Del

Table 63. Scancode Set when Control Character 02
X0

x1

x2

x3

0x

Ar↓

Ar↑

Al↓

Al ↑

Cl ↓

1x

Pg Dwn

Home







Cl ↑
F6

Cr ↓
F1

Cr ↑
F2

BS
F3



Tab
F4

F5

ESC

F7

F8

F9

F10

2x

Space

!

“

#

$

%

&

‘

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

3x

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

:

;

<

=

>

?

4x

@

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

5x

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

[

\

]

^

_

6x

‘

a

B

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

7x

p

q

R

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

{

|

}

Product Reference Guide

Del

328

Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252
Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the
legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western
languages.

Product Reference Guide

329

NOTES

330

Gryphon™ I GD44XX/GBT4400/GM440X

ASCII Chart
ASCII
Char.

Hex No.

ASCII
Char.

Hex No.

ASCII
Char.

Hex No.

ASCII
Char.

Hex
No.

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

SP
!
“
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

Australia
Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd
Telephone: [61] (2) 9870 3200
australia.scanning@datalogic.com
France and Benelux
Datalogic Scanning SAS
Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00
france.scanning@datalogic.com
Germany
Datalogic Scanning GmbH
Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0
germany.scanning@datalogic.com
India
Datalogic Scanning India
Telephone: 91- 22 - 64504739
india.scanning@datalogic.com
Italy
Datalogic Scanning SpA
Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1
italy.scanning@datalogic.com

Japan
Datalogic Scanning KK
Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761
japan.scanning@datalogic.com
Latin America
Datalogic Scanning, Inc
Telephone: (305) 742-2206
latinamerica.scanning@datalogic.com
Singapore
Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD
Telephone: (65) 6435-1311
singapore.scanning@datalogic.com
Iberia
Datalogic Scanning SAS Sucursal en España
Telephone: 34 91 746 28 60
spain.scanning@datalogic.com
United Kingdom
Datalogic Scanning LTD
Telephone: 44 (0) 1582 464900
uk.scanning@datalogic.com

www.scanning.datalogic.com

Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140

© 2010-2013 Datalogic Scanning, Inc.

820033714 (Rev. C)

January 2013



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : ebwillis
Create Date                     : 2013:01:17 11:57:43Z
Modify Date                     : 2013:01:31 11:37:10-08:00
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : ebwillis
Title                           : 33714.book
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2013:01:31 11:37:10-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:083f4f51-40be-48ab-a20e-e66002c4f37f
Instance ID                     : uuid:90647068-3af1-40b6-b1bd-8a2c1902f901
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 334
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu